CMZ 900D Gyrocompass User’s Manual...v IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00 < Foreword > Foreword Thank you for purchasing the Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd. CMZ900 Gyrocompass

CMZ 900DGyrocompassUser’s Manual

IM 80B10M-17E

IM 80B10M-17E3rd Edition

i

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

CONTENTSForeword.................................................................................................................vi1. Overview.................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Features of CMZ900..........................................................................................1-11.2 Gyrocompass System......................................................................................1-31.3 Device Composition Type................................................................................1-41.4 Connection with External Devices..................................................................1-5

1.4.1 Input Signal ........................................................................................1-5

1.4.2 Output Signal .....................................................................................1-5

1.5 Outline of Operation .........................................................................................1-61.5.1 Startup and Stoppage........................................................................1-6

1.5.2 Operation Unit....................................................................................1-6

1.5.3 Normal Display...................................................................................1-7

1.5.4 Output Heading Selection..................................................................1-8

1.5.5 Command Function ...........................................................................1-8

1.6 Outline of Alarm ..............................................................................................1-101.6.1 The Display When Alarm is Generated ...........................................1-10

1.6.2 Buzzer Stop......................................................................................1-10

1.6.3 Confirmation of Alarm Causes.........................................................1-10

1.7 Maintenance and Inspection ......................................................................... 1-111.7.1 Daily Inspection................................................................................ 1-11

1.7.2 Regular Inspection........................................................................... 1-11

1.8 Definition of Terms..........................................................................................1-12

2. Hardware ................................................................................................... 2-12.1 Component Models ..........................................................................................2-12.2 Component Names and Functions.................................................................2-3

2.2.1 Master Compass [MKM026] .............................................................2-3

2.2.2 Control Box [MKC327] .....................................................................2-4

2.2.3 AC Adapter [MKS066/MKS071] ......................................................2-4

2.2.4 Repeater Compass [MKR050]..........................................................2-5

2.2.5 Junction Box [MKN019] .....................................................................2-6

2.2.6 Steering Repeater Compass [MKR056]............................................ 2-6

3. Operation................................................................................................... 3-13.1 Startup and Stoppage.......................................................................................3-1

3.1.1 The Procedure of Startup and Stoppage........................................... 3-1

CMZ900D GyrocompassUser’s Manual

IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition

ii


3.1.2 Startup Sequence ..............................................................................3-2

3.1.3 Hot Start and Cold Start .....................................................................3-3

3.2 Operation Unit ...................................................................................................3-53.2.1 The Name of Each Part of C.Operation Unit and Its Functions......... 3-6

3.2.2 The Name of Each Part of M.Operation Unit and Its Functions ........ 3-8

3.3 Display of Normal State..................................................................................3-103.4 Command Mode..............................................................................................3-12

3.4.1 The Classification of Command Functions......................................3-12

3.4.2 Command Code List ........................................................................3-13

3.4.3 Operation in the Command Mode ...................................................3-15

3.4.4 The Procedure for Changing the Value ...........................................3-18

4. Function Explanation and operation method ....................................... 4-14.1 Display Functions.............................................................................................4-1

4.1.1 Displaying Heading............................................................................4-2

4.1.2 Displaying Heading Deviation............................................................4-3

4.1.3 Displaying Rate of Turn......................................................................4-4

4.1.4 Displaying Running Time...................................................................4-5

4.1.5 Dimmer and Contrast Rank Display and Adjust ................................ 4-6

4.1.6 Displaying Gyrosphere Phase Current.............................................. 4-7

4.1.7 Displaying Backup Battery Voltage....................................................4-8

4.1.8 Displaying Deviation Volatage ...........................................................4-9

4.1.9 Dispalying Software Version Number..............................................4-10

4.2 Setting Functions............................................................................................4-134.2.1 External Heading Input Selection ....................................................4-14

4.2.2 Speed Setting for Speed Error Correction.......................................4-15

4.2.3 Latitude Setting for Speed Error Correction ....................................4-16

4.2.4 Automatic Alignment of Master Compass .......................................4-17

4.2.5 Manual Alignment of Master Compass............................................4-19

4.2.6 Setting the Master Compass Follow-up Gain..................................4-21

4.2.7 Displaying/Resetting Cause of Master Compass Alarm.....................4-22

4.2.8 Displaying/Resetting Cause of C.Operation Unit Alarm..................4-23

4.2.9 Deviation Alarm Setting....................................................................4-24

4.2.10 Startup Timer Setting .......................................................................4-25

4.3 Maintenance Functions..................................................................................4-314.3.1 Permission for Maintenance Function .............................................4-32

4.3.2 Outputting Simulated DAC Signals..................................................4-33

4.3.3 Manual Drive of Master Compass ...................................................4-35

4.3.4 Manual Drive of Repeater Compass ...............................................4-36

4.3.5 Resetting Gyrosphere Running Time ..............................................4-37

4.3.6 Resetting Log...................................................................................4-38

4.3.7 Initializing Backup Memory..............................................................4-39

4.3.8 Correction of the Master Compass Installation Error ......................4-40

iii


4.3.9 Displaying Log .................................................................................4-43

4.4 Generation Function.......................................................................................4-544.4.1 Permission for Generation Function................................................4-55

4.4.2 Setting the Follow-up Speed for Stepper Signal..............................4-56

4.4.3 Setting Communication Protocol of Output Port..............................4-57

4.4.4 Setting Format of Output Port..........................................................4-58

4.4.5 Setting Format of Input Port.............................................................4-63

4.4.6 Miscellaneous ..................................................................................4-69

4.5 Heading Signal Selection...............................................................................4-784.5.1 Prohibition of Heading Changeover.................................................4-78

4.5.2 Gyrocompass Heading Changeover Method...................................................4-79

4.5.3 External Heading Changeover Method ...........................................4-82

4.6 "MUTE" Function of Alarm Sound ...............................................................4-83

5. Troubleshooting ....................................................................................... 5-15.1 Advice for Specific Situations.........................................................................5-15.2 Alarm ..................................................................................................................5-2

5.2.1 The Display When Alarm has been Generated ..................................... 5-2

5.2.2 Confirmation of Error Factor ..............................................................5-3

5.2.3 Cancellation of Alarm.........................................................................5-3

5.2.4 Presumption Causes and Countermeasures .................................... 5-4

5.3 Repeater Compass Error Contents and Countermeasures......................... 5-85.3.1 The Display when Alarm has been Generated on the Repeater Compass

5-8

5.3.2 Procedure for Aligning Repeater Compass Indication ...................... 5-9

6. Specifications ........................................................................................... 6-16.1 Performance and Specifications.....................................................................6-1

6.1.1 Power Supply.....................................................................................6-1

6.1.2 Input Signal ........................................................................................6-1

6.1.3 Output Signal .....................................................................................6-1

6.1.4 Setting Time and Accuracy ................................................................6-2

6.1.5 Environmental Specifications (Normal Operating Conditions).......... 6-2

6.1.6 External Input /Output Signal Specifications and Circuits ................. 6-3

6.2 Serial Input/Output Data Sentence .................................................................6-86.3 Setting Dip Switches ........................................................................................6-96.4 List of Initial Values......................................................................................... 6-116.5 External Product View....................................................................................6-13

7. Maintenance, Inspection and Installation............................................................7-17.1 Inspection ..........................................................................................................7-1

7.1.1 Daily Inspection..................................................................................7-1

7.1.2 Regular Maintenance.........................................................................7-1

7.2 Maintenance of the Gyrosphere......................................................................7-27.2.1 Precautions During Removal.............................................................7-2

iv


7.2.2 Removing the Gyrosphere.................................................................7-3

7.2.3 Installing the Gyrosphere...................................................................7-8

7.2.4 Replacement of Lamps in the Repeater Compass .........................7-14

7.2.5 Replacing the Fuse..........................................................................7-14

7.2.6 Confirmation of System Operation ..................................................7-15

7.2.7 Preparation of Supporting Liquid .....................................................7-15

7.3 Precautions During Installation ....................................................................7-167.3.1 Vibration Measures..........................................................................7-16

7.3.2 Parallelism of Lubber’s Lines...........................................................7-16

7.3.3 Service Area.....................................................................................7-16

Appendix-1 Description of Speed Error and Speed Error Table....................A-11.1 Speed Error....................................................................................................... A-11.2 Determining Speed Error ................................................................................ A-1

Appendix-2 Principle of Gyrocompass ............................................................A-52.1 Gyro................................................................................................................... A-52.2 North-seeking Tendency of Gyrocompass................................................... A-62.3 Gyrocompass Errors....................................................................................... A-7

2.3.1 Speed Error........................................................................................A-7

2.3.2 Acceleration Error ..............................................................................A-7

2.3.3 Rolling and Pitching Error ..................................................................A-7

Appendix-3 Block Diagram................................................................................A-8Appendix-4 Components List..........................................................................A-37

4.1 Master Compass ............................................................................................ A-37(1) MKM026-1,4 ....................................................................................A-37

(2) MKM026-2,3 ...................................................................................A-39

4.2 Control Box..................................................................................................... A-40(1) MKC327-F,W ...................................................................................A-40

(2) MKC327-S .......................................................................................A-41

4.3 Repeater Compass (MKR050) ...................................................................... A-424.4 Junction Box (MKN019) ................................................................................ A-434.5 Steering Repeater Compass (MKR056)....................................................... A-444.6 AC Adapter (MKS066).................................................................................... A-454.7 Dual AC Adapter (MKS071) ........................................................................... A-464.8 Junction Unit (MKN018) ............................................................................... A-474.9 C.Operation Unit (MKR040).......................................................................... A-47

Appendix-5 Serial Signal Format ....................................................................A-485.1 Basic Format ................................................................................................. A-485.2 Existing Format.............................................................................................. A-495.3 Heading Output for Repeater compass....................................................... A-52

v


< Foreword >

ForewordThank you for purchasing the Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd. CMZ900 Gyrocompass.

This manual describes the functions, operating procedures, and the handling precautions of the CMZ900 Gyrocompass. To ensure correct use, please read this manual thoroughly before beginning operation.

� About this manual• This manual should be read by the end user.

• Read this manual thoroughly and have a clear understanding of the product before operation.

• After you have finished reading this User’s Manual, be sure to keep it at your side.

• This manual explains the functions of the product. Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd. does not guarantee that the product will suit a particular purpose of the user.

• Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without the permission of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd. is strictly prohibited.

• The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.

• Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents. However, should you have any questions or find any errors, please contact your nearest Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd. dealer.

� Trademarks• All the brands or names of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd.’s products used in this manual are

either trademarks or registered trademarks of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd..

• For purposes of this manual, the TM and ® symbols do not accompany their respective trade-mark names or registered trademark names.

• Company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trade-marks of their respective holders.

� Safety precautions

� Notes about environmental condition for using To use the CMZ900 Gyrocompass, keep the environment that satisfies “Specification” and “Equip-ment condition” of this product. See chapter 6 about specification of this products. And see section 7.3 about precautions during installation. The details of precautions during installation is described in approval drawing.

� Notes about installation• To install this products , follow the “Notes for installation” of approval drawing.

• If reinstallation will be needed , contact your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd..

� Notes about preparation before usingRead this manual thoroughly and have a clear understanding of the product before operation.

vi


< Foreword >

� Notes about using other than usageThis products are designed for gyrocompass for vessel. Do not use for other purpose.

� Notes about maintenance and inspection• Regular inspection is recommended to keep this system good condition.

• Do not detach the unit cover without the instruction of service engineer.

• Contact your nearest service agent when the inspection which is not permitted in this manu-al is needed.

� Notes about abnormal circumstances• When abnormal allophone or abnormal smell is generated from this product, turn off the

power supply. After then deal with referring to this manual chapter 5. If it is impossible to deal, contact your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd..

• Do not keep using the system , if dealing methods are unknown when the system is under abnormal condition.

• Contact your nearest service or sales agent to repair the system.

• When there is some instruction about the method of trouble shooting from service department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. , obey the instructions and work.

� Notes about disposal of the productsWhen this product is scrapped , follow the regulations specified by each country.A lithium battery is used in this product. Before disposing , insulate the both of terminals of lithium battery with insulation tape. Dispose of the lithium battery as industrial waste following the regula-tions.

� Notes about disposal of the used supporting liquid• To dispose of used supporting liquid , please request processing to permitted industrial waste

disposal trader.

• Or contact your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd..

� Precautions related to the protection, safety, and alteration of the product• The following safety symbols are used on the product and in this manual.

"Handle with care." To avoid injury and damage to the instrument, the operator must refer to the explanation in the manual.

“Risk of Electric Shock”

Protective ground terminal

AC

"High temperature." To avoid injury caused by hot surface, do not touch locations where this symbol appears.

vii


< Foreword >

• For the protection and safe use of the product and the system controlled by it, be sure to follow the instructions and precautions on safety that are stated in this manual whenever you handle the product. Take special note that if you handle the product in a manner that violate these instructions, the protection functionality of the product may be damaged or impaired. In such cases, Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. does not guarantee the quality, performance, function, and safety of the product.

• When installing protection and/or safety circuits such as lightning protection devices and equip-ment for the product and control system or designing or installing separate protection and/or safety circuits for fool-proof design and fail-safe design of the processes and lines that use the product and the control system, the user should implement these using additional devices and equipment.

• If you are replacing parts or consumable items of the product, make sure to use parts specified by Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd..

• Do not modify this product without instruction from service engineer of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. .

� Exemption from responsibility• Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. makes no warranties regarding the product except those

stated in the WARRANTY that is provided separately.

• Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. assumes no liability to any party for any loss or damage, direct or indirect, caused by the user or any unpredictable defect of the product.

� How to use this manualThe following markings are used in this manual.

Improper handling or use can lead to injury to the user or damage to the instrument. This symbol appears on the instrument to indicate that the user must refer to the user’s manual for special instructions. The same symbol appears in the correspond-ing place in the user’s manual to identify those instructions. In the manual, the symbol is used in conjunction with the word “WARNING” or “CAUTION.”

WARNINGCalls attention to actions or conditions that could cause serious or fatal injury to the user, and pre-cautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences.

CAUTIONCalls attentions to actions or conditions that could cause light injury to the user or damage to the instrument or user’s data, and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences.

NOTECalls attention to information that is important for proper operation of the instrument.

viii


< Foreword >

� Important Cautions

WARNING

Risk of Electric Shock

Turn off the power before carrying out any wiring.

CAUTION

Do not perform an insulation resistance test using a megohmmeter except on the ship’s power terminals. Performing such a test may cause a failure in the gyro system.Precautions in handling the gyrosphere

• Hold the gyrosphere firmly with both hands so as not to subject it to any shock.

• Do not drop the gyrosphere. Dropping the gyrosphere may result in damage to the internal mechanism or lead to personal injury.

• Do not disassemble the gyrosphere.

Precautions in handling the container

• Hold the container firmly with both hands.

• Do not drop it. Dropping the gyrosphere may result in damage to the internal mechanism or lead to personal injury.

Polishing of the slip ring is prohibited

• Carry out cleaning by wiping dirt off the slip ring with ethyl alcohol or ligroin.

� About the replacement parts for repair• After discontinuation of production, the possession period of the replacement parts is ten

years.

• The replacement parts for repair are the parts necessary to maintain the function of this prod-uct.

ix


< Foreword >

� Handling precautions

� Startup of gyrocompass(1) Startup the gyrocompass at least 5 hours before the ship’s departure.

(2) After startup, do not touch the internal unit of the Master compass. Otherwise the equipment may be damaged or an error generated.

� Handling in cold districtsSince the Master compass container containing the gyrocompass is filled with liquid, if a gyrocom-pass is to be stopped in a cold district where the ambient temperature is -3°C or less it should therefore be handled as shown below.

(1) In the case where it is stopped for a period of a few days or less:

Wrap the Master compass in a blanket or the like to provide heat insulation.

(2) In the case of a prolonged stopping period (a week or more):

Drain the liquid completely.

� External heading out putExternal heading can use with the Master compass′s signal driver circuits. Turn on the main power of the Master compass (MKM026) in case of using external heading.

NOTEThe external heading sensor is optional unit. If the external heading sensor is not installed or con-nected to gyrocompass, external heading signal can not be used.

� Heading changeover Normally the heading signal is switched from other gyrocompass or external heading signal with operating key on the C.operation unit. In the following condition, it is not possible to switch.

· Master compass is standing by to start.· The other sensor which is scheduled to switch is abnormal.· Exchanging the signal is prohibited.

CAUTIONPlease execute the switch of heading signal between gyrocompass and external sensor in the safety area.

NOTEWhen external heading signal is used at other systems of RADAR , ECDIS or etc. , the signal format should be fit for other system.

x


< Foreword >

� G1/G2 gyro select switch on the changeover unitThe G1/G2 gyro select switch in control box should not be switched excluding the emergency (ex. Failure of C.operation unit). Normally use the G1/G2 changeover switch in “NOR” position. If the G1/G2 changeover switch is used in excluding “NOR” position, the following phenomenon will occur.(1) An alarm is generated and unable to change heading signal The switch alarm (error code : 130) will occur. And even if gyro heading selection key or ex-

ternal heading selection key is pushed, it is unable to change azimuth signal.(2) The stepper signals become asynchronously Because the stepper signals of two Mastercompass become asynchronously, the heading of

the device which is using stepper signal will become disagreement.

� Action method to heading changeover failureRefer to section 4.5.2(2) when the heading changeover with an operation unit becomes impossible.

1-1


< 1.Overview >

1. OverviewThe CMZ900 Gyrocompass fully conforms to the technical requirements of the IMO resolu-tion A.424 (XI), gyrocompass performance standards, as well as to JIS F9602, Class A stand-ards. The anti-vibration structure has been strengthened and improvement of the follow-up performance has been achieved, leading to increased rigidity of the gyrocompass in all types of ships, from small to large.

1.1 Features of CMZ900� High north-seeking accuracy

High north-seeking accuracy is achieved because of the following configuration: The gyrosphere, the heart of the gyrocompass, is supported in a container filled with liquid, which prevents distur-bance from affecting the center pin. In addition, two gyro-rotors rotate at a high speed and work with each other to cancel out errors due to the rolling, pitching and yawing of a ship.

� Excellent vibration resistance and shock resistanceA unique anti-vibration mechanism enhanced by the velocity damping effect of high viscous oil, provides superior damping of vibration and decoupling of shock at sea.

� Improvement of follow-up performanceThe container size is more reduced and it is realized more stabilized follow-up performance has been achieved.

� Digitalization of Master compass headingThe master compass heading is displayed with digital numbers. It offers easy reading of the heading.

� Automatic speed-error correcting functionSpeed-error is corrected automatically by entering the ship’s speed signal and latitude signal re-spectively from the log and GPS or the like. The amount of latitude change in the case where there is no latitude signal input is estimated from a calculation of the ship’s speed and heading. In a B-Type system, this function is implemented in the remote unit.

� Functions for various displays and settingsVarious types of gyrocompass information can be displayed and set on the Master compass op-eration unit and remote unit.

� Preparation of outputs corresponding to every requirementIn addition to the digital heading signal output for the Repeater compass, the stepper heading signal output, digital signal output (IEC61162-1/-2), analog heading, quadrant, and angular turning velocity signal output are equipped as standard.

� Onboard battery driveCompass running by the onboard battery is available as standard.

1-2


< 1.Overview >

� Built-in startup timerThe restart time of the timer can be set from 1 to 99 hours.

� Heading output using external azimuth sensor signalUsing the heading signal from the external heading sensor (GPS compass, magnet compass, etc.) signals can be output to external connecting device such as Repeater compasses or a radar.

1-3


< 1.Overview >

1.2 Gyrocompass SystemThe CMZ900 Gyrocompass determine the ship’s heading using gyrosphere which is included in Master compass.The heading signal is displayed on operation unit, and is output to Repeater compass or external units.If any system failure will be occurred, the buzzer will sounds and the FAIL LED will blink.The gyrocompass system is composed of the following units;

� Master compassThe Master compass is detect ship’s heading and calculate rate of turn.These signals are output to any units. The M.operation unit is included in this Master compass.

� Repeater compass / Steering repeater compassThe Repeater compass is receive serial heading signal from Master compass, and indicates ship’s heading.

� Control boxThe Control box is connected to Master compass and other external device. This unit drives each heading signals. This unit is used with D-Type.

� Operation unitThe operation unit is used to control gyrocompass. There are two kinds of operation units. One is C.operation unit and the other is M. Operation Unit. C.operation unit is standard device in Type-S / D and optional device in Type-B.

See chapter 2. for detail of system construction.

1-4


< 1.Overview >

1.3 Device Composition TypeCMZ900 has 3 type systems. Each systems has different composition and specification. The sys-tem composition is described in chapter 2.

� CMZ900B (Not explain in this manual)B-Type is composed of master compass, repeater compass and steering repeater compass. This type is used with a medium ship by a small ship.The automatic speed error correction is achieved using C. operation unit (option) and Junction unit (option). The backup of power supply is achieved using AC adapter (option).

� CMZ900S (Not explain in this manual)S-Type is composed of master compass, control box, repeater compass and steering repeater compass. This type is used with a large ship by a medium ship. This type equips control box nor-mally and can execute the functions which are optional functions for CMZ900B. This type has many signal distribution drivers for external units.

� CMZ900DD-Type is composed of two master compasses, control box, dual AC adapter, repeater compasses, steering repeater compass. This type is used with a large ship by a medium ship. This system al-ways observes errors by using the heading signal comparison data. If some error occurs on the system, it is possible to exchange heading signal from the one hand to the other hand by operat-ing the C. operation unit (software) or selector switch (hardware). This changeover function improves the reliability of the system.

1-5


< 1.Overview >

1.4 Connection with External DevicesCMZ900 Gyrocompass has speed error correction using ship’s speed and position signal from external devices. The heading signal or external input signal is output to external devices such as Autopilot, Radar, Course Recorder and more.

1.4.1 Input SignalThe following signals can be input from external devices to gyrocompass.

Input signal External devices Signal formatShip’s speed signal E.M.Log, Doppler Log, GPS, etc. IEC61162-1 Serial , PulseLatitude signal GPS, etc. IEC61162-1 SerialHeading / Rate of turn signal Magnet compass , GPS compass, etc. IEC61162-1 Serial

The setting of serial signal format is possible according to the generation command.See chapter 6 for specification of signal input.See chapter 4 to set signal format using generation command.

1.4.2 Output SignalThe following signals can be output to external devices from gyrocompass.

Output signal External devices Signal formatRepeater compass heading signal Repeater compass IEC61162-1 SerialStepper heading signal Radar, etc. 3Bit gray code

Serial heading / Rate of turn signal Autopilot, Universal data display, etc. IEC61162-1 SerialAnalog heading / Rate of turn signal Course recorder, ROT Indicator, etc. Analog (0 to 5V)

The setting of serial signal format is possible according to the generation command.See chapter 6 for specification of signal input.See chapter 4 to set signal format using generation command.

1-6


< 1.Overview >

1.5 Outline of OperationThis section describes the operation of gyrocompass.

1.5.1 Startup and StoppageThe gyrocompass starts when the main power supply is turned on. The Master compass starts North-seeking. The Repeater compasses receive heading signal and start display.The gyrocompass settles within 5 hours, and displays true heading.The gyrocompass stops when the main power supply is turned off. The detail of startup is described in section 3.1.

1.5.2 Operation UnitThe gyrocompass is operated with the operation unit. Operation unit displays heading and the in-formation. And it is used for setting the gyrocompass. There are two kinds of operation units. One is C.operation Unit and the other is M.operation unit. C.operation unit is standard device in Type-S/D and optional device in Type-B. See section 3.2 for details of function and operation of operation unit.

GYRO1 GYRO2

GYRO1GYRO2

EXT

EXT

COMMAND

FAILBZ STOP SELECT

ENT

DIMMER / LAMP TEST

GYROCOMPASS OPERATION UNIT

Control box

C.operation unit

RUN

EXT

FAIL

EXT

ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWA

SHIFT▼ ▲

UP COMMANDBZ STOP

Master compass

M.operation unit

1-7


< 1.Overview >

1.5.3 Normal DisplayThe gyrocompass become to “Normal Mode” through the “Standby status” at startup.The operation unit displays the heading and status like at the standby.See section 3.3 for details of displays in “Normal Mode”.

� Normal display on C.operation unitThe heading and system status are displayed on screen.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

SPD.MANUAL

+00[kt]

LAT.MANUAL

N 00[°]

>123.4

126.0

STBY

123.4

ea in i pla

S te tatu i pla

Input et o

Input alue

� Normal display on M.operation unitThe heading is displayed on the heading display.(The displayed heading is not corrected speed error. So the displayed heading on M.operation unit might be different from the heading on C.operation unit or Repeater compass while the ship is navigating.)

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWAYo o a a Dens i i i Co. Lt

Hea in isp a

1-8


< 1.Overview >

1.5.4 Output Heading SelectionCMZ900D is composed of two Master compasses. If some error occurs on the system, it is possible to exchange heading signal between No.1 Gyrocompass and No.2 Gyrocompass.And If external heading signal is input, gyro compass can select it. If master compass is damaged seriously, all output signals can be output by using the external signal.To select the heading, press the heading selection key.

1.5.5 Command FunctionThe command for the setting is prepared in CMZ900.Call-up code for various data display/setting in the CMZ900 Gyrocompass are assigned to the predetermined numbers (command code). Calling the command code, it is possible to achieve various function.Move to command mode from normal mode to use command function.See section 3.4 for detail of command function.

� List of Command Function

Clas-sifi-

cationCommand

code

Operation unit Function item

Execu-tion

during standby

Page

C M

Display Function

○ ○ Compass heading display ○ 3-10○ – True heading and system status display

10 ○ – True heading and value of speed error correction dis-play ○ 4-2

11 ○ – Heading deviation display ○ 4-312 ○ – Turn rate display ○ 4-4

13○ ○ Gyro sphere running time display ○ 4-5○ – Total running time and the time after startup display

14 ○ – Dimmer rank display ○ 4-615 ○ ○ Gyro-sphere phase current display ○ 4-716 ○ ○ Backup battery voltage display ○ 4-817 ○ – Deviation voltage display ○ 4-9

19 ○ ○ Software version number display ○ 4-10

Setting Function

20 ○ – External heading input selection ○ 4-1421 ○ ○ Speed setting for speed error correction ○ 4-1522 ○ ○ Latitude setting for speed error correction ○ 4-1623 ○ ○ Automatic alignment of Master compass × 4-1724 ○ ○ Manual alignment of Master compass × 4-1925 ○ ○ Setting the Master compass follow-up gain ○ 4-21

26 ○ ○ Displaying/resetting cause of Master compass alarm ○ 4-22

27 ○ – Displaying/resetting cause of C.operation unit alarm ○ 4-2328 ○ – Deviation alarm setting ○ 4-2429 ○ – Startup timer setting ○ 4-25

1-9


< 1.Overview >

Clas-sifi-

cationCommand

code


Execu-tion

during standby

Page

C M

Maintenance Function

30 ○ ○ Permission for maintenance function ○ 4-3231 ○ ○ Outputting simulated DAC signals × 4-3332 ○ ○ Manual drive of Master compass ○ 4-3533 ○ ○ Manual drive of Repeater compass ○ 4-3634 ○ ○ Resetting gyrosphere running time ○ 4-3735 ○ ○ Resetting log ○ 4-3836 ○ ○ Initialization of backup memory ○ 4-3937 ○ ○ Correcting Master compass installation error ○ 4-4039 ○ ○ Log display ○ 4-43

Generation Function

40 ○ ○ Permission for generation function ○ 4-55

41 ○ ○ Setting the follow-up speed for stepper signal ○ 4-56

42 ○ – Setting communication protocol of output port ○ 4-57

43 ○ – Setting format of output port ○ 4-58

45 ○ – Setting format of input port ○ 4-63

49 ○ – Miscellaneous functions ○ 4-69

○ : Means that execution is permitted × : Means that execution is not permitted

– : Means that the function is not Implemented.

1-10


< 1.Overview >

1.6 Outline of AlarmIf abnormal condition occurs on gyrocompass, an alarm is generated.

1.6.1 The Display When Alarm is GeneratedWhen an alarm is generated, the buzzer sounds and the alarm LED blinks.The error code and the cause of the alarm are displayed on the screen of C.operation unit.

The error message disappears by pushing the command key.

1.6.2 Buzzer StopPressing the buzzer-stop key stops the buzzer.

1.6.3 Confirmation of Alarm CausesThe alarm LED goes out if the alarm is reset, but continues to light up if the alarm continues.The check procedure when the alarm is generated is described to Chapter 5.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

GYRO FAILED!

G1:CODE= 010

Gyro current

excess

---.-

>126.0

HDG FLT

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

GYRO FAILED!

G1:CODE= 010

Gyro current

excess

---.-

>126.0

HDG FLT

123.4

1-11


< 1.Overview >

1.7 Maintenance and InspectionImplement the following procedures of the daily inspection and regular inspection to main-tain the gyrocompass in a state of normal working order:

1.7.1 Daily InspectionThe inspection items are as follows.

Inspection Item Inspection Contents and Procedure RecommendedInspection Interval

1Gyrosphere drive current Check that the current is within the range 0.15 A

to 0.35 A by executing the command code “15”. (See section 4.1.6)

Once/day (at an arrival)

2 Repeater compass align-ment

Check that the heading of each Repeater com-pass agrees with that of the Master compass. Once/departure

3Ship’s speed value Latitude Check that there are no errors in ship’s speed

and latitude by executing the command codes “21” and “22”. (See section 4.2.2 and 4.2.3)

Once/day

4 Azimuth error Check that there is no azimuth error using astro-nomical or physical target observation. Once/day

5

DC Battery input Check that the DC input voltage of AC Adapter (MKS066/MKS071) are regulated voltage. MKS066 : TB1 3-4 and 23-24 MKS071 : TB1 3-4 and TB2 3-4

Once/year

NOTECheck the readings of the Repeater compass card when the ship’s speed is set to “0.” If a speed-

1.7.2 Regular InspectionPerform the following maintenance once a year.

NOTEOrder to the Service Department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. for regular inspection.

Inspection Item Procedure1 Gyrosphere Cleaning of the lower and band electrode .

2 Container Cleaning of inside surface ,center pin (Exercise care when handling.) , lower electrode ,band electrode, follow-up electrode.

3 Supporting Liquid Replacement of supporting liquid4 Air filter Cleaning of the air filter. (Replace the air filter when remarkably dirty.)

1-12


< 1.Overview >

1.8 Definition of TermsThis section describes the definition of terms used in this manual.

Compass heading The heading detected by the master compass

True heading The heading obtained by subtracting the value of the speed error correction from the compass heading

Value of speed-error correction The error calculated from the ship’s heading, speed and latitude

Output headingA heading output to external connected device (such as repeater compasses).Either the gyro heading or external sensor heading should be selected.

Gyro heading True heading

External sensor heading A heading to be input from external heading sensors (such as magnet compass/GPS compass and the like)

2-1


< 2.Hardware >

2. Hardware2.1 Component Models

CMZ900D are composed following units. The units are selected for the usage.

� CMZ900D System Configuration

INMARSATRADARGPS . . .et

AUTO PILOTIBSINS . . .et

M R M R

X22 AX2 1A X21

M N 1

M R1 1A/1 1A M R 2

M M 2M C 2

M S /M S 1

M M 2

Conne tion Box

ori ontal Bra et Tiltin Bra et ori ontal Stan

Repeater Co pa Sterrin Repeater Co pa

Serial Si nal or Repeater Co pa

Cour e Re or er RATE OF TURN

STEPPER SIGNAL

Serial Si nalIEC 11 2 1

Analo to

MASTER COMPASS

No.1 Po er Suppl 2 DC

No.1 Po er Suppl 1 to 22 AC /

No.2 Po er Suppl 2 DC

2 DC Po er Suppl

No.2 Po er Suppl 1 to 22 AC /

AC A apter

De i e to be onne te

MASTER COMPASS Control Box

C.operationUnitM R

2-2


< 2.Hardware >

� Component Models

M M 2 1 M T

CMZ D

M M 2

M M 2

M C 2 F

M C 2 S

M C 2

M R G X22 A

M N 1 G X2 1A

X21

M R P X22 A

M N 1 P X2 1A

X21

M R

M S /MKS071

M R

M R 2

M R 2

M R 2

M R 2

M R 2

G ro o pa

Ma ter o pa

Control box

Repeater o pa

SteerinRepeater o pa

C.Operation Unit

AC A apter

Stan Alone t pe

Pilot tan t pe

Con ole t pe

Flu ount t pe

Pilot tan t pe

all ount t pe

Glan t pe

Plu t pe

Conne tionbox

ori ontal tan

ori ontal tan

ori ontal bra et

ori ontal bra et

Tiltin bra et

Tiltin bra et

G ro p ere

S it Unit

S it Unit

M.Operation Unit

M.Operation Unit

M.Operation Unit

Conne tionbox

2-3


< 2.Hardware >

2.2 Component Names and Functions2.2.1 Master Compass [MKM026]

Master compass detects ship's heading.

� Master Compass Stand Alone TypeThis master compass is stand alone type which includes components to exclusive case.

Switch unit

M.operation unit

Container with Gyrosphere

See section 3.2.2 for name of each part of M.operation unit and its functions.

� Pilot Stand typeThis type includes gyro compass units into stand.

C.operation Unit

M.operation Unit

Container with gyrosphere

Fuse

No.1 power switch

No.2 power switch

External output power switch

Gyro select switch

Autopilot Stan

See section 3.2.1 for name of each part of C. operation unit and its functions.

� Console TypeThis type is used to be included into ship's bridge console. This type master compass has plate and rails for drawing it out.

2-4


< 2.Hardware >

2.2.2 Control Box [MKC327] The Control box distributes heading signals and power to other units and receives signals from other units. The Control box equips C.operation unit on the front cover and equips power switches and terminals into the box.

GYRO1 GYRO2

GYRO1GYRO2

EXT

EXT

COMMAND

FAILBZ STOP SELECT

ENT

DIMMER / LAMP TEST


Front

In i e

ront co er

C.operation unituse

o. ower switch

o. ower switch

Gyro se ect switch

terna output power switch

er ina oar

The Control box has three kinds of structures which are wall mount type, flush mount type and built-in Pilot stand type.See section 3.2.1 for name of each part of C.operation unit and its functions.

2.2.3 AC Adapter [MKS066/MKS071] This unit supplies DC power to master compass.

M M 1

Front ieInsi e ie

Fuse

ower switch

er inal loc

Front co er

Fuse

ower switch

2-5


< 2.Hardware >

2.2.4 Repeater Compass [MKR050]The repeater compass receives a heading signal from the master compass, indicates the true heading.

ointer

Sca e e ree /roun

Sca e 1 e ree /roun

Top ie

Si e ie

Sha ow pin ountin ho e

ori onta stan

ori onta rac et

i tin rac et

unction o

er ina u

Connector

NOTEIf the heading of repeater compass has errors, check and adjust it referring to chapter 5.

2-6


< 2.Hardware >

2.2.5 Junction Box [MKN019]This unit receives heading signal and power from Master compass and drives Repeater compass. It is used to adjust dimmer.

ai in icator reT i i lit or blin en an error i ete te .Nor all it i o .

un in icator reenT i blin en ero a u t ent i bein arrie out. Nor all it i lit.

ero a ust ent switchU e en t ere a been a i t in t e alue in i ate b t e Repeater o pa .

i er controTurnin t i ial a u t t e illu ination o t e o pa aran run in i ator .

G an or ConnectorConne t to Repeater o pa .

G anConne t to Ma ter o pa or ontrol box.

2.2.6 Steering Repeater Compass [MKR056]

DIMMER

FAIL

RUN SYNC

ointer

cale 1 egrees roun

cale egrees roun

i er controlTurnin t is ia a usts t e i umination o t e compasscar an run in icator E .

Fail in icator E

un in icator E

ero a ust ent switch

3-1


< 3.Operation >

3. OperationThis chapter describes the operation of the CMZ900 Gyrocompass system.

3.1 Startup and StoppageNOTE

Startup the gyrocompass at least 5 hours before the ship's departure.

3.1.1 The Procedure of Startup and StoppageConfirm the presence of power supply for the system at startup.

� The operation on the Control box and Autopilot stand.The gyrocompass is started up and stopped by operating the main power switch in the Control box or Autopilot stand. The power switch is placed at right hand in the Control box or Autopilot stand. For startup, locate the toggle switch to ON side. For stoppage, locate the toggle switch to OFF side.

In i e o t e Autopilot tan

In i e o t e ontrol box

o. ower switch

o. ower switch

terna output power switch

o. power switch

o. power switch

terna outputpower switch

3-2


< 3.Operation >

3.1.2 Startup SequenceThe following processes are passed until gyro sphere is stabilized and true heading is output.

Po er OnMain it i turne on

Repeater o pa po er ONStepper ROT po er ON

Zero a u t ent o Ma tero pa

t e Ma ter o pa i ollo e ro p ere ea in

Zero a u t ent o Repeatero pa

Output in al are tarte

T e Repeater o pa an tepper i nal ea in ollo e

to Ma ter o pa ea in

T e ro p ere ea in i ettle an t e te output true ea in

about our

about 2 inute

about 1 inute

Supplie po er to te an t e rotator in ro p ere i tarte to rotate.

T e Ma ter o pa tart ero a u t ent en t e p a e urrent i lo er t an . A an t ere olution o rotator o e on tant.

3-3


< 3.Operation >

3.1.3 Hot Start and Cold Start

� Flow diagram

Turn on ea o t e ip AC an DCpo er upplie or t e ro o pa te .

Turn on t e ain po er it .

I AC po er i not upplie to t ete turn on DC po er onl .

Re olution o t e ro p ere rotor i i .→P a e urrent i i er t an . A

Re olution o t e ro ere rotor i lo .→P a e urrent i . A or le

Col tart ot tart

･S te tatu STBY･T e ollo up operation o t e Ma ter o pa top .･Ali nin operation i pro ibite .･P a e urrent e rea e blo . A an en it rate o an e be o e lo t e o pa enter no al operatin tatu .

Nor al tatu ・S te tatu blan

T e ro o pa enter nor al operation tatu i e iatel .

Start up the gyrocompass at least 5 hours before performing normal operation.After the power switch is turned on, the gyrocompass system is started up at either hot start or cold start depending on the condition of the gyro-sphere.If the gyro rotor is rotating at a high enough speed to detect the heading, hot start begins, however, if it is rotating at a speed that is too low to detect the heading, cold start begins.The rotating status of the gyro rotor is determined by monitoring the phase current.

3-4


< 3.Operation >

� Hot startHot start begins if the value of the phase current immediately after turning on the power is 0.35 A or less and follow-up of Master compass, signal input/output, and indicator LEDs are normal.

� Cold startCold start begins if the value of the phase current immediately after turning on the power is higher than 0.35 A. The stand-by state continues until the phase current drops and the rate of change in the phase current drops below a specified level. Normal operation will start when these requirements are met. During stand-by, functions of Master compass automatic aligning and manual aligning cannot be carried out. After about 2 hours, the heading becomes to practical and gyrocompass is ready for operation.

0.35A

Nor al

P a e urent

Ti e

0.35A

Nor al

P a e urent

Ti e

0.35A

Time

NormaSTAND BY

P ase curent0.35A

Time

NormaSTAND BY

P ase curent

3-5


< 3.Operation >

3.2 Operation UnitThe gyrocompass is operated with the operation unit. Operation unit displays heading and the in-formation. And it is used for setting the gyrocompass. There are two kinds of operation units. One is C.operation Unit and the other is M.operation unit.

� C.operation unitThe C.operation unit is equipped on the front door of Control box or Autopilot stand. The operation unit is used for operating the Master compass and setting the communication port to connect with the external devices. It is possible to shift operation right to M.operation unit.

GYRO1 GYRO2

GYRO1GYRO2

EXT

EXT

COMMAND

FAILBZ STOP SELECT

ENT

DIMMER / LAMP TEST


Control box

C.operation unit

� M.operation unitThe M.operation unit is equipped on the front panel of Master compass (Stand alone type / Console type). The M.operation unit is used for operating the Master compass which is connected with. Some commands can not be operated with M.operation unit. (Refer to section 3.4.2)

RUN

EXT

FAIL

EXT

ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YOKOGAWA

SHIFT▼ ▲

UP COMMANDBZ STOP

Master compass

M.operation unit

3-6


< 3.Operation >

� The operation mode of operation unitThe operation units have two mode. The one mode is used for displaying the azimuth data and system status. This mode is named "Normal mode".The other mode is used for displaying the detail information and setting the system. This mode is named "Command mode".

COMMAND

C.operation Unit

COMMAND

BZ STOP

M.operation Unit

PreCOMMAND e

PreCOMMAND e

Nor al Mo e

Co an Mo e

Di pla in t e ea in Di pla in t e te tatu Di pla in t e ata to u e pee error orre tion C.operation unit

Exe utin t e o an Di pla un tion Settin un tion Maintenan e un tion Generation un tion

3.2.1 The Name of Each Part of C.Operation Unit and Its Functions

This section describes the name of each part of C.operation unit and its functions.

� The name of each part

GYRO GYRO

GYROGYRO

EXT

EXT

COMMAND

FAILBZ STOP SELECT

ENT

DIMMER / LAMP TEST


Hea in isp a area Data isp a area A arm LED anBu er stop e

Se ect LED anse ect e

Arro e s

ENT eComman e

Dimmer e

E terna ea inse ection e

G ro ea in se ection e

3-7


< 3.Operation >

� The function of each part

� Heading displayDisplays a compass heading and system status.

� Data displayIndicates displays corresponding to menus and each command code.

� Alarm LED and buzzer stop key Displays alarm statuses for the gyrocompass system.

If pressed when an alarm is generated, the alarm buzzer is stopped.

� Select LED and Select key Displays and selects the operating initiative (C.operation unit or M.operation unit). keep the

key pressed for at least two seconds.

When LED is lit, this unit can be operated.

When LED goes off, M.operation unit can be operated.

� Arrow key Carry out selection of commands and data and switching of displays.

ENT keyEnters and sets commands and data.

COMMAND key If pressed when in normal mode, the display switches from the data display to the MAIN

MENU.

If pressed when the display is in access mode, the display returns to normal mode.

� Dimmer key Adjusts brightness of the displays of this unit.

In addition, if this key is pressed in combination with the ENT key, contrast of the LCD can be adjusted.

If both keys are simultaneously pressed, a lamp test is performed.

� External heading selection key Changes the output heading to that of the external heading (bow heading input from external

heading sensor). keep the key pressed for at least two seconds.

Gyro heading selection key If GYRO1 key is pressed, the output heading is changed to the gyro heading (true heading of

the No.1 master compass).

If GYRO2 key is pressed, the output heading is changed to the gyro heading (true heading of the No.2 master compass).

keep the key pressed for at least two seconds.

If key �, � or is to be operated, keep the key pressed for at least two seconds.

NOTEThe back-light of external heading selection key is not lit on system that the external-input is not available.

3-8


< 3.Operation >

3.2.2 The Name of Each Part of M.Operation Unit and Its Functions

This section describes the name of each part of M.operation unit and its functions.

NOTEIf the C.operation unit has operation rights ,the M.operation unit can not be operated. To operate the M.operation unit, press the selection key on the C.operation unit and turn off the selection LED.

� The name of each part

ON

OFFPO ER

GYROCOMPASS

RUN

EXT

FAIL

EXT

ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt .

S IFT▼ ▲

UP COMMANDBZ STOP

Po er it External ea in ele tor it

Set/Di er e Co an /Bu er top e

ENT e

Data i pla area

G ro ea in i pla area

RUN in i ator LEDEXT in i ator LEDFAIL in i ator LED Co an o e i pla area

� The function of each part

� Power switch Turns on/off the power to the gyro system.

� External heading selector switch If the switch is kept pressed for 2 seconds or more when in normal mode, the output heading

(gyro heading/external heading) is selected.

When the C.operation unit is used, this switch isn’t used.

� Set/dimmer key In normal mode these are dimmer keys that adjust the level of brightness of all displays on the

M.operation unit. The displays can be darkened by pressing the ▼ key and brightened by pressing the ▲ key. Brightness can be adjusted in 32 steps.

If two keys are simultaneously pressed, a lamp test is performed.

If the key is pressed in command selection mode or command execution mode, data is input. Pressing the SHIFT key changes the input digit (blinks) while pressing the UP key changes the numeric value in the input digit.

3-9


< 3.Operation >

� Command/buzzer stop key If this key is pressed in normal mode, the mode changes to the command selection mode, and

if pressed in command selection mode or command execution mode, the mode returns to normal.

If pressed when an alarm is generated, the alarm buzzer and blinking of the FAIL indicator LED stops.

� ENT keyEnters an input value in command selection mode or command execution mode. To carry out operations with this key switch, keep it pressed for 2 seconds.

Data display area Displays/sets data when a command is executed.

Gyro heading display areaDisplays a compass heading.

� Command code display areaDisplays a command code.

� RUN indicator LED Lights up when the power switch is turned “on.”

EXT indicator LED Goes out when the currently selected output heading is the gyro heading and lights up when

the output heading is the external sensor heading.

�11 FAIL indicator LED Blinks when an alarm is generated.

If the “BZ STOP” key is pressed, it lights up during an alarm and goes out when the alarm is restored to normal.

3-10


< 3.Operation >

3.3 Display of Normal StateDisplays of the operation unit at startup (normal state) will be described below.

� Displays of the C.operation unit at normal stateThe heading display indicates true headings of each heading sensor and system status, and the data display indicates input method and input value of ship’s speed and ship’s position (the figure on the right is an example of this display).

� Heading displayThe true heading of the No.1 master compass is displayed in the first line (GYRO 1), the true head-ing of the No.2 master compass is displayed in the second line (GYRO 2) and the heading of ex-ternal heading sensor is displayed in the third line (EXT) of the heading display.The display is blank for heading values not connected to this C. operation unit.The true heading whose heading value is ineffective is displayed with "- - - . - ". ( i.e. signal input error.)For the heading sensor that is selected, ">" is displayed immediately before the heading.To switch to another heading sensor, press the external heading selector key or the gyro heading selector key (cannot be selected to an unconnected compass).

� System status displayThe gyro system status is displayed in the bottom line of the heading display. The system status at normal running is not shown and the display is blank.

System Status

STBY Displayed when No.1 and No.2 master compass is in stand-by status.G1 STBY Displayed when No.1 master compass is in stand-by status.G2 STBY Displayed when No.2 master compass is in stand-by status.HDG FLT Displayed when there is a failure with the azimuth sensor that is selected.

PWR FLT (*1)Displayed when there is a failure of the No1 and No2 AC power supply to the system equipped with the DC backup system. This indication is held even if an AC power supply recovers. In-dication disappears when a COMMAND key is pushed.

PWR1FLT (*1)Displayed when there is a failure of the No1 AC power supply to the system equipped with the DC backup system. This indication is held even if an AC power supply recovers. Indication disappears when a COMMAND key is pushed.

PWR2FLT (*1)Displayed when there is a failure of the No2 AC power supply to the system equipped with the DC backup system. This indication is held even if an AC power supply recovers. Indication disappears when a COMMAND key is pushed.

C/O FLT Displayed when the automatic changeover is not possible.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

SPD.MANUAL

+00[kt]

LAT.MANUAL

N 00[°]

>123.4

126.0

STBY

123.4

Hea in isp a

S stem status isp a

Input met o

Input a ue

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

SPD.MANUAL

+00[kt]

LAT.MANUAL

N 00[°]

>123.4

126.0

STBY

123.4

Hea in isp a

S stem status isp a

Input met o

Input a ue

3-11


< 3.Operation >

C/O PRF Displayed when the changeover operation is not permitted.ALIGN Displayed during heading change over. (From gyrocompass to gyrocompass)

COP1FLT Displayed when the main power supply of changeover BD ASSY is abnormal.COP2FLT Displayed when the sub power supply of changeover BD ASSY is abnormal.

MUTE Displayed when the mute function of alarm sound is enable.

*1: This indication is held even if an AC power supply recovers. Indication disappears when a COMMAND key is pushed.

� Input methodThere are displayed the method of input for speed and latitude.

MANUAL The value is set manually.AUTO The value is input from external sensor.

� Input valueThe values to correct the speed error is displayed.

� Displays of the M.operation unit at normal mode

� Heading displayThe gyro heading display shows a compass heading, in-dications in the command and data displays disappear.

� System status displayDuring standby the gyro heading dispaly indicates the compass heading when the power was last turned off , and the data display indicates “C.S.” .

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER

YO OGA AYo o a a Den i i i Co. Lt

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


3-12


< 3.Operation >

3.4 Command ModeThis section describes the functions which are achieved in command mode and the procedures to execute.

3.4.1 The Classification of Command FunctionsThe command functions are classified into following four types.

� The displaying functionThe displaying function is used for displaying various information.

� The setting functionThe setting function is used for setting and adjusting to using the gyro compass properly.

� The maintenance functionThe maintenance function is used for maintaining and operation verification when the system is rigged or regular inspection. This function is not used for normally. The system will request to input password when this function is used.

� The generation functionThe generation function is used for setting to connect external units.This function is not used for normally. The system will request to input password when this function is used.

See chapter 4 for the operation procedure of each functions.

Column:Each functions are assigned individual command code. The command function is a generic name of the function that can be achieved by operating these command codes.

3-13


< 3.Operation >

3.4.2 Command Code ListThis section shows the list of command codes assigned for each function.Some functions can not be operated when gyrocompass is standing by.See chapter 4 for the operation procedure of each functions.

NOTESome commands can not be operated with M.operation unit. Refer to the following table for the executable commands on the M.operation unit.

� Command code list

Clas-sifi-

cationCommand

code


Execution during

standbyPage

C M

Display Function

○ ○ Compass heading display ○ 3-10○ – True heading and system status display


11 ○ – Heading deviation display ○ 4-312 ○ – Turn rate display ○ 4-4



19 ○ ○ Software version number display ○ 4-10Setting Function

20 ○ – External heading input selection ○ 4-1421 ○ ○ Speed setting for speed error correction ○ 4-1522 ○ ○ Latitude setting for speed error correction ○ 4-1623 ○ ○ Automatic alignment of Master compass × 4-1724 ○ ○ Manual alignment of Master compass × 4-1925 ○ ○ Setting the Master compass follow-up gain ○ 4-21


27 ○ – Displaying/resetting cause of C.operation unit alarm ○ 4-2328 ○ – Deviation alarm setting ○ 4-2429 ○ – Startup timer setting ○ 4-25

3-14


< 3.Operation >

Clas-sifi-

cationCommand

code


Execution during

standbyPage

C M

Maintenance Function

30 ○ ○ Permission for maintenance function ○ 4-3231 ○ ○ Outputting simulated DAC signals × 4-3332 ○ ○ Manual drive of Master compass ○ 4-3533 ○ ○ Manual drive of Repeater compass ○ 4-3634 ○ ○ Resetting gyrosphere running time ○ 4-3735 ○ ○ Resetting log ○ 4-3836 ○ ○ Initialization of backup memory ○ 4-3937 ○ ○ Correcting Master compass installation error ○ 4-4039 ○ ○ Log display ○ 4-43

Generation Function

40 ○ ○ Permission for generation function ○ 4-55

41 ○ ○ Setting the follow-up speed for stepper signal ○ 4-56


43 ○ – Setting format of output port ○ 4-58

45 ○ – Setting format of input port ○ 4-63

49 ○ – Miscellaneous functions ○ 4-69



3-15


< 3.Operation >

3.4.3 Operation in the Command ModeTo execute the commands shift to “Command Mode”. This section describes about “Command Mode”.

� Operation on C.operation unitPress the command key to shift the “Command Mode”. After then an menu appears on the data display area. The commands are executed by selecting the menu item.Press the command key to return to the Normal Mode from the Command Mode.

� Accessing Menus

(1) Rough classification menuIf the command key is pressed when in normal mode, the MAIN MENU appears in the data dis-play (the figure on the right).The item that is selected blinks. (The blinking part is called the cursor.)Select an item by moving the position of the cur-sor with the up and down arrow keys.

If the down arrow key is pressed when the cursor resides in the bottom line, the displayed menu shows the next page.If the up arrow key is pressed when the cursor resides in the top line, the displayed menu shows the preceding page.To return to normal mode from the display thus accessed, press the COMMAND key.

(2) Medium classification menuSelect “1 Display” from the MAIN MENU and press the ENT key. The MAIN MENU switches to the Disp.MENU (as shown in the figure on the right).

Select “2 Operate” from the MAIN MENU and press the ENT key. The MAIN MENU switches to the Operat.MENU (as shown in the figure on the right).

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

MAIN MENU

1 Display

2 Operate

3 Maintain

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

MAIN MENU

2 Operate

3 Maintain

4 Generate

>123.4

126.0

123.4

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

MAIN MENU

1 Display

2 Operate

3 Maintain

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

MAIN MENU

2 Operate

3 Maintain

4 Generate

>123.4

126.0

123.4

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Disp.MENU

10 HDG

11 DEV

12 ROT

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Operat.MENU

20 EXT SEL

21 SPD SET

22 LAT SET

>123.4

126.0

123.4

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Disp.MENU

10 HDG

11 DEV

12 ROT

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Operat.MENU

20 EXT SEL

21 SPD SET

22 LAT SET

>123.4

126.0

123.4

123.4

3-16


< 3.Operation >

Select “3 Maintain” from the MAIN MENU and press the ENT key. The MAIN MENU switches to the Maint.MENU (as shown in the figure on the right).

Select “4 Generate” from the MAIN MENU and press the ENT key. The MAIN MENU switches to the Generat.MENU (as shown in the figure on the right).

� Flow of accessing menus

ENT

SPD.MANUAL +00[kt] LAT.MANUAL N 00[°]

MA N MENU1 D2 O t3 M t



MA N MENU2 O t3 M t4 G t



ENT ENTENT

D .MENU10 DG11 DE12 ROT

O t.MENU20 EXT SEL21 SPD SET22 LAT SET

M t.MENU30 P

G t.MENU40 P

ENT ENT ENT ENT

OMMAND

Nomaisp a

Me iumc assi icationmenu

Rouc assi icationmenu

Disp a menu Operation menu Maintenance menu Generation menu

To isp a in ea in To e terna ea ininput se ection

To pass or input ormaintenance mo e

To pass or input oreneration mo e

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Maint.MENU

30 Password

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Generat.MENU

40 Password

>123.4

126.0

123.4

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Maint.MENU

30 Password

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Generat.MENU

40 Password

>123.4

126.0

123.4

123.4

3-17


< 3.Operation >

� Operation on M.operation unitThis paragraph describes the operation procedures on the M.operation unit.Press the command key to shift the “Command Mode”.Press the command key to return to the Normal Mode from the Command Mode.

� Operation flowPress the command key to shift the “Command Mode”. After then the code number “00” appears and blinks on the command code display area. Input the command code for executing the com-mand. Press the ENT key 2 times each 2 seconds or more for command decision. (If command code number is less than 20, press ENT key 1 time.)

COMMAND DATA

COMMANDBZ STOP

COMMAND DATA

U P▲

S IFT▼

U P▲

COMMAND DATA

COMMAND DATA

ENT

COMMANDBZ STOP

blin in

1 Nor al o e

2 Co an ele tion o e

Co an ex ution o e

T e alue o pla e o ten be o e 1 .

T e blin in o e to pla e o one.

T e alue o pla e o one be o e .

Pu ENT e 2 ti e ea 2 e on or ore.

Pu UP e ti e .blin in

3-18


< 3.Operation >

3.4.4 The Procedure for Changing the ValueThis section describes the procedure for changing the set value.

� The procedure on C.operation unitThe set value is changed using arrow keys on the C.operation unit. The set value is fixed by press-ing ENT key.

� The item selection operation

I t e 1I t e 2I t e I t e . . .

Set alueen i pre e T e pre iou ite i ele te .

en i pre e T e next ite i ele te .

� The setting value input operation

1

2

3

4

5

6

W en is presse T e pre ious item is se ecte .

W en is presse T e cursor mo e to ne t p ace.

W en is presse T e ne t item is se ecte .

W en is presse T e cursor mo e to pre ious p a

Set a ue

It is same procedure to input alphabet.

� The procedure on M.operation unitThe set value is changed using SHIFT and UP keys on the M.operation unit. The set value is fixed by pressing ENT key.

� The item selection operation

...

Set a ue

UP▲T e ne t item is se ecte e er pressin t e e .

� The setting value input operation

...

UP▲

SHIFT▼

Set a ue

W en is presse t e in in p ace mo es to t e ne t.

T e ne t a ue is se ecte e er pressin t e e .

4-1


< 4.Function Explanation and operation method >

4. Function Explanation and operation method

This chapter describes the functions of CMZ900D. The operation , the adjusting and the setting methods of gyrocompass which are executed by using the commandfunctions are described in section 4.1, 4.2, 4.3 and 4.4. The heading exchange functionis described in section 4.5. The mute function of alarm sound is described in section 4.6.

Refer to the chapter 3 for the procedure of executing the command function. And execute these operation with enough understanding

4.1 Display FunctionsThis section describes how to display various information.

The following 9 items can be displayed.

CommandCode

Operation Unit Function Item

Execution during

StandbyPage

C M○ ○ Compass heading display ○ 3-10○ – True heading and system status display


11 ○ – Heading deviation display ○ 4-3

12 ○ – Turn rate display ○ 4-4



19 ○ ○ Software version number display ○ 4-10



Each functions are executed by operating of the C.operation unit or the M.operation unit.

See the section 3.2 for the operation unit.See the section 3.4 for the command function.See the section 3.4.4 for the value input method.

4-2



4.1.1 Displaying HeadingCOMMAND CODE :10

This function displays the true heading , the compass heading, and the value of speed error correction .

� Operation with the C.operation UnitSelecting “10 HDG” from the Disp.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the heading.

Each true heading, compass heading and speed error correction (only for master compasses)of the No.1 master compass (GYRO1), No.2 mas-ter compass (GYRO2), and external unit (EXT) are displayed in the first,Pressing the right and left arrow keys switches the display between true heading, compass heading and the value of speed error correc-tion.The upper, middle and lower figure on the right is an example of displaying the true heading (True HDG), compass heading (Compass HDG) (*1) and the value of speed error correction (SPD Error).If the command key is pressed, the screen re-turns to normal mode.

*1: The "Compass HDG" displayed on operation unit is the value which corrected with master compass installation error.

� Operation with the M.operation unitNOTE

It is not possible to execute this function with the M.operation unit.

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

123.4°

True HDG

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

122.9°

Compass HDG

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

-00.5°

SPD Error

>123.4

126.0

123.4° 123.4

122.9° 123.4

-00.5° 123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

123.4°

True HDG

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

122.9°

Compass HDG

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

-00.5°

SPD Error

>123.4

126.0

123.4° 123.4

122.9° 123.4

-00.5° 123.4

4-3



4.1.2 Displaying Heading DeviationCOMMAND CODE : 11

This function displays the heading deviation between gyrocompass heading and external heading. The unit of display is degree(s).

� Operation with the C.operation UnitSelecting "11 DEV" from the Disp. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the heading deviation.Deviation values of each azimuth sensor based on the heading currently being output are dis-played.

The figures on the right show examples of dis-playing the heading deviations .

If the command key is pressed, the screen re-turns to normal mode.

NOTEThe deviation between gyrocompass and external signal is not displayed when external signal is not input.

� Operation with the M.operation unit

NOTEIt is not possible to execute this function with the M.operation unit.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G2 G1 00.2

D t

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 G2 00.2

D t

123.4

126.0

E G2 02.4

G1 E 02.6

>123.6

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 E 02.4

D t

123.4

>126.0

G2 E 02.6

G2 G1 00.2

123.6

E G1 02.6

G2 E 02.4

123.6

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G2 G1 00.2

D t

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 G2 00.2

D t

123.4

126.0

E G2 02.4

G1 E 02.6

>123.6

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 E 02.4

D t

123.4

>126.0

G2 E 02.6

G2 G1 00.2

123.6

E G1 02.6

G2 E 02.4

123.6

4-4



4.1.3 Displaying Rate of TurnCOMMAND CODE : 12

This function displays the Rate of Turn. There are two kinds of units of display. One is “degree(s)/second”, the other hand is “degree(s)/minute”.

� Operation with the C.operation UnitSelecting “12 ROT” from the Disp. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the rate of turn.Each turn rate for No.1 master compass and No.2 master compass are displayed in the first and second line of the display ,respectivelyIf the right and left arrow keys are pressed, the display for rate of turn units can be changed from degrees/minute to degrees/second.The upper figure on the right shows an example of displaying a rate of turn in degrees/minute and the lower figure on the right, an example of displaying a rate of turn in degrees/second.



GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

123.4°

ROT

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

12.34°

ROT

>123.4

126.0

123.4° 123.4

12.34° 123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

123.4°

ROT

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

12.34°

ROT

>123.4

126.0

123.4° 123.4

12.34° 123.4

4-5



4.1.4 Displaying Running TimeCOMMAND CODE : 13

This function displays the total running time of Master compass, the running time of gyrosphere and the run-ning time after startup.

� Operation with the C.operation UnitSelecting “13 Run Time” from the Disp.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the running time.

The first line (G1), second line (G2), and third line (OP) indicate the running time of No. 1 master compass, No. 2 master compass, and the op-eration unit, respectively.

If the right and left arrow keys are pressed, the display can be switched between the total run-ning time, gyrosphere running time, and time after startup.

The upper, middle and lower figures on the right show examples of displaying total running time (Total time), gyrosphere running time (Gyro time) and the time after startup (Power time) respec-tively.


NOTEThe M.operation unit displays the gyrosphere-running-time only .

Running hours of the current gyrosphere is displayed (from 000000 to 999999 hours).If the command code “13” is executed, the upper two digits of the six digits of the gyrosphere running time are displayed in the data display.If the SHIFT key is pressed, the middle two digits of the six digits are displayed, and if the SHIFT key is pressed once more the lower two digits of the six dig-its with a decimal point after the least significant digit are displayed.If for example, the running time of the gyrosphere is 1952 hours, the digits “00” → “19” → “52.” will be displayed.→ “19” → “52.” will be displayed. “19” → “52.” will be displayed.→ “52.” will be displayed. “52.” will be displayed.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 001234h

OP 012345h

Total time

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 012345h

Gyro time

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 000123h

OP 000123h

Power time

>123.4

126.0

G2 001235h 123.4

G2 001236h 123.4

G2 000124h 123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 001234h

OP 012345h

Total time

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 012345h

Gyro time

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 000123h

OP 000123h

Power time

>123.4

126.0

G2 001235h 123.4

G2 001236h 123.4

G2 000124h 123.4

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


4-6



4.1.5 Dimmer and Contrast Rank Display and AdjustCOMMAND CODE : 14

This function displays dimmer rank and contrast rank on the C.operation unit.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting "14 Dim level" from the Disp. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play showing the dimmer rank (as shown in the figure on the right).

The figure to the right shows an example of dis-playing the dimmer rank of 16 and contrast rank of 13 in the operation unit.

� adjusting the valueThe dimmer rank is adjusted by operating the DIMMER key.The contrast rank is adjusted by operating the DIMMER key while pressing the ENT key.

To increase the brightness and contrast, press key.

To decrease the brightness and contrast, press key.


NOTEM.operation unit does not display the dimmer rank.

� adjusting the valueThe dimmer rank is adjusted by operating the SET/DIMMER key. To increase the brightness, press ▲ key. To decrease the brightness , press ▼ key.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

16 32 D M.

13 32 ONT.

D .

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

16 32 D M.

13 32 ONT.

D .

>123.4

126.0

123.4

4-7



4.1.6 Displaying Gyrosphere Phase CurrentCOMMAND CODE : 15

This function displays the gyro sphere’s phase current (gyro sphere’s driving current). This value is useful for estimating the gyro sphere’s state.The normal value is in the range from 0.15 A to 0.35 A.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “15 G.Current” from the Disp.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play showing the gyro-sphere phase current (as shown in the figure on the right).

The normal value is in the range from 0.15 A to 0.35 A.

� Operation with the M.operation unitThe gyrosphere phase current (current for driving the gy-rosphere) is displayed (0.00 to 0.99 A).Normal value : from 0.15 A to 0.35 A.If the command code “15” is executed, two decimal plac-es of the gyrosphere phase current are displayed in the data display.The figure to the right shows an example of 0.21A of the gyrosphere phase current.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

0.21 A

G t

>123.4

126.0

0.21 A 123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

0.21 A

G t

>123.4

126.0

0.21 A 123.4

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


4-8



4.1.7 Displaying Backup Battery VoltageCOMMAND CODE : 16

This function displays battery voltage of being used for backup memory.If this command is executed with the C.operation unit, the unit displays battery voltage of the C.operation unit and the Master compass.If this command is executed with the M.operation unit, the unit displays battery voltage of the Mas-ter compass.The normal value is in the range from 2.5 V to 4.0 V.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “16 BT.Volt” from the Disp.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the backup battery voltage (as shown in the figure on the right).

� Operation with the M.operation unitThe voltage of the battery for backup memory is displayed (from 0.0 to 9.9 V).

If the command code “16” is executed, the backup battery voltage is displayed in the data display.The figure to the right shows an example of 3.6 V for the voltage of the backup battery.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 3.75V

OP 3.98V

BATT.Volt

>123.4

126.0

G2 3.75V 123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 3.75V

OP 3.98V

BATT.Volt

>123.4

126.0

G2 3.75V 123.4

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


4-9



4.1.8 Displaying Deviation VolatageCOMMAND CODE : 17

This function displays deviation voltage of used Master compass.The normal value is in the range from -0.4 V to 0.4 V.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “17 DV.Volt” from the Disp.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the deviation voltage (as shown in the figure on the right).



GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

0.12

D . t

>123.4

126.0

0.23 123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

0.12

D . t

>123.4

126.0

0.23 123.4

4-10



4.1.9 Dispalying Software Version NumberCOMMAND CODE : 19

This function displays software version number.If this command is executed with the C.operation unit, the unit displays the version of the C.opera-tion unit and the Master compass.If this command is executed with the M.operation unit, the unit displays version of the Master compass.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “19 Soft.Ver.” from the Disp.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play showing the software version number (as shown in the figure on the right).If the command key is pressed, the screen re-turns to normal mode.

� Operation with the M.operation unitThe software version number of master compass is shown by major version (alphabet) and minor version (numerical value).The major version is shown by numerical value at M.op-eration unit. The version “A” is shown as ‘01’. The minor version is shown by numerical value of two digits. When command 19 is executed, the major version is dis-played. The minor version is displayed by pressing shift key. The decimal point is displayed in displaying the minor version.The display is switched by pressing the shift key.The figure on the right shows an example of displaying software version number “A01”.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 CD065A01

OP CD066A01

Soft.Ver.

>123.4

126.0

G2 CD065A01 123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 CD065A01

OP CD066A01

Soft.Ver.

>123.4

126.0

G2 CD065A01 123.4

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


4-11



� The operation flow diagram of the display function (C.operation unit)

ENT

OMMAND




D .MENU13 R T14 D 1 G. t


A

123.4° 123.4°

T DG

00. ° 00. °

SPD E

122. ° 122. °

DG

ENT

>123.4 123.6 126.0

G2 G1 00.2°E G1 02.6°E G2 02.4°D t

GYRO 1GYRO 2EXT

123.4° 123. °

ROT

ENT

12.34°12.3 °

ROT

ENT

G1 001234G2 00123OP 01234T t t

G1 01234G2 001236

G t

G1 000123G2 000124OP 000123P t

16 32 D M. 13 32 ONT.

D .

A


D .MENU16 BT. t1 D . t1

D .MENU16 BT. t1 D . t1

D .MENU1 D . t1 1 S t. .

ENT

0.2 A 0.26 A

G t

ENT

G1 3.G2 3. 6OP 3.BATT. t

ENT

0.1 0.16

D . t

ENT

G1 D06 A01G2 D06 A01OP D066A01S t. .

ENT

Mi iumc ass icationmenu

Disp a inHea in

Disp a in Hea inDe iation

Disp a in Rateo Turn

Disp a inRunnin Time

Disp a inDimmer Ran

Disp a inG rosp ereP ase Current

Disp a inBac up Batter

o ta e

Disp a inDe iation

o ta e

Dispa inSo t are ersionNum er

From an screen

Norma mo e

4-12



� The operation flow diagram of the display function (M.operation unit)

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT▼

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT▼

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT▼

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT▼

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT▼

COMMANDBZ STOP

Di pla in ro p ererunnin ti e

Di pla in ro p erep a e urrent

Di pla in ba upbatter olta e

Dipla in o t areer ion nu ber

Fro an reen

Nor al o e

4-13



4.2 Setting FunctionsThe setting function is used for setting and adjusting to using the gyrocompass properly.

The maintenance functions include the following:

CommandCode


Execution during

StandbyPage

C M20 ○ – External heading input selection ○ 4-1421 ○ ○ Speed setting for speed error correction ○ 4-1522 ○ ○ Latitude setting for speed error correction ○ 4-1623 ○ ○ Automatic alignment of Master compass × 4-1724 ○ ○ Manual alignment of Master compass × 4-1925 ○ ○ Setting the Master compass follow-up gain ○ 4-21


27 ○ – Displaying/resetting cause of C.operation unit alarm ○ 4-2328 ○ – Deviation alarm setting ○ 4-24

29 ○ – Startup timer setting ○ 4-25



Each functions are executed by operation of the C.operation unit or the M.operation unit.

See the section 3.2 for the operation unit

See the section 3.4 for the command function.

See the section 3.4.4 for the value input method.

4-14



4.2.1 External Heading Input SelectionCOMMAND CODE : 20

C.operation unit has 3 input ports for the serial signal and all port can be connected the heading sensors. This COMMAND executes the status display of each port and the selection of external heading sensor that display as EXT.The example of connected external heading sensor and the selecting procedure are as follows.

� The example of connected external heading sensor Port 1 : Magnetic compass (TMC unit)

Port 2 : THDPort 3 : disconnected

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “20 EXT SEL” from the Operat.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the external heading input selection.

External heading input information for external heading input ports 1 to 3 is displayed (as shown in the figure on the right).

External heading input information

NONE Without external heading input settingOK With external heading input setting; External heading input information is being normally input.NG With external heading input setting; External heading input information failure is being generated.

For the port used as the external heading, “>” is displayed immediately before “Port-.”In order to change input ports, move the “>” to the targeted port by pressing the up or down arrow key and press the ENT key. The display blinks, signaling the need to validate the change.If the ENT key is pressed again, blinking stops and the input port is changed. However, the port cannot be changed without setting the external heading input.



GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

>Port-1 OK

Port-2 NG

Port-3 NONE

EXT HDG SEL

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

>Port-1 OK

Port-2 NG

Port-3 NONE

EXT HDG SEL

>123.4

126.0

123.4

4-15



4.2.2 Speed Setting for Speed Error CorrectionCOMMAND CODE : 21

This is a function to setting the ship’s speed for correcting speed-error.Determine the true heading by calculation the value for speed-error-correction from the values of speed and latitude.

True heading (degrees) = (compass heading) – (Value of speed-error-correction) – (Value of Installation-error-correction)

Value of speed-error-correction (degrees) = Ship’s speed [knot] × cos (Compass heading) 5π cos (Latitude)

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “21 SPD SET” from the Operat.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing speed-error correction speed input.The figure on the right shows an example of dis-playing ship’s speed of 23 knots (kt) with auto-matic input.To select automatic or manual input, press the ENT key. Both AUTO and MANUAL blink. Then, with the up or down key select either AUTO or MANUAL and press the ENT key.If AUTO is selected, the automatic ship’s speed input becomes valid.If MANUAL is selected, the tens digit of the ship’s speed blinks, allowing for a value between 00 to 99 kt to be entered for the ship’s speed by manual.Press the right or left arrow key to change the place of input and press the up or down arrow key to change the numeric value.After entering ship’s speed press the ENT key. The input value blinks, signaling the need to validate the change. If the ENT key is pressed again, blinking stops and the input value is changed.

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “21” is executed, the current speed is displayed in the data display and its tens digit (digit to be entered) blinks.Press the shift key to change the digit and then change the numeric value of the digit by pressing the UP key to enter a new speed (from 00 to 99 kt). The figure to the right shows an example of entering the speed 10 kt.After entering the speed, the entered value blinks if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed continuously and is set as the final value.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

NOTEIt is not possible to execute this function while speed signal input is on AUTO mode.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

+23kt

AUTO

SPD SET

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

+23kt

AUTO

SPD SET

>123.4

126.0

123.4

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


4-16



4.2.3 Latitude Setting for Speed Error CorrectionCOMMAND CODE : 22

This is a function to setting the ship’s latitude for correcting speed-error.Determine the true heading by calculation the value for speed-error-correction from the values of speed and latitude.

True heading (degrees) = (compass heading) – (Value of speed-error-correction) – (Value of Installation-error-correction)

Value of speed-error-correction (degrees) = Ship’s speed [knot] × cos (Compass heading) 5π cos (Latitude)

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “22 LAT SET” from the Operat.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the speed-error correcting latitude input.The figure on the right shows an example of displaying the latitude of 39 °N.To select automatic or manual input, press the ENT key. Both AUTO and MANUAL blink. Then, with the up or down key select either AUTO or MANUAL and press the ENT key.If AUTO is selected, the automatic latitude input becomes valid.If MANUAL is selected, the character N or S blinks allowing for a value between 00 to 70 degrees N or S to be entered for the ship’s latitude by manual. Select N or S with up or down arrow key and press ENT key.Press the right or left arrow key to change the place of input and press the up or down arrow key to change the numeric value.After entering the latitude press the ENT key. The input value blinks, signaling the need to validate the change. If the ENT key is pressed again, blinking stops and the input value is changed.

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “22” is executed, the current latitude is displayed in the data display and its tens digit (digit to be entered) blinks. If the latitude displayed is south, a decimal point is displayed after the least significant digit. For example, with a latitude of 16° S, “16.” is displayed.To change the digit, press the SHIFT key and then change the numeric value of the digit by pressing the UP key to enter a latitude (from 00 N or S to 70 N or S). The figure to the right shows an example of entering 45° N.After a value for the latitude has been entered, the en-tered value blinks if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds, the en-tered value is displayed continuously and is set as the final value.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

NOTEIt is not possible to execute this function while speed signal input is on AUTO mode.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

N 39°

AUTO

LAT SET

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

N 39°

AUTO

LAT SET

>123.4

126.0

123.4

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


4-17



4.2.4 Automatic Alignment of Master CompassCOMMAND CODE : 23

This is a function to align the azimuth of the container and the compass heading by detecting the zero point of the gyrocompass system again.

� Operation with the C.operation uniSelecting "23 Sync.Auto" from the Operat. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches the display showing automatic master compass alignment (as shown in the figure on the right).

"Follow Up" is displayed, signifying that the mas-ter compass is following up the gyrosphere.

After pressing the ENT key, G1 blinks, enabling the operator to select the master compass with which automatic alignment is conducted (G1 or G2 or G1/G2) by pressing the up or down arrow keys.Pressing the ENT key again after selection has been made calls up the Ready display, which indicates standby for automatic alignment mode. (The second and subsequent figures on the right show examples of the display indication when No. 1 master compass is automatically aligned.)

If the ENT key is again pressed, the "Running" display appears showing that automatic align-ment is being carried out. (The master compass starts automatic alignment.)If automatic alignment finishes normally, the "Success" display appears. If the automatic alignment finished abnormally, the alarm will be generated. If a failure occurs, execute master compass alignment manually

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Follow Up

Sync.Auto

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Ready

Sync.Auto

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Running

Sync.Auto

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Success

Sync.Auto

>123.4

126.0

Gyro=G1

Gyro=G1

Gyro=G1

Gyro=G1

123.4

123.4

123.4

123.4

Follow Up

Follow Up

Follow Up

Follow Up

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Follow Up

Sync.Auto

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Ready

Sync.Auto

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Running

Sync.Auto

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Success

Sync.Auto

>123.4

126.0

Gyro=G1

Gyro=G1

Gyro=G1

Gyro=G1

123.4

123.4

123.4

123.4

Follow Up

Follow Up

Follow Up

Follow Up

4-18



� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “23” is executed, alignment starts and the container rotates to detect the zero point: “CA” blinks in the data display and the alignment can be sus-pended by pressing the COMMAND key.If the alignment is completed normally, “CA” is still dis-played but stops blinking and the gyro heading display indicates “000.0” (see the figure to the right).If the alignment is not successful (zero point cannot be detected), an alarm is generated and the “CA” continues to blink. If this occurs, carry out manual alignment.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


4-19



4.2.5 Manual Alignment of Master CompassCOMMAND CODE : 24

If automatic Master compass alignment cannot be executed, it is necessary to adjust the compass heading to the container heading. There are relative value alignment and absolute value alignment as the adjustment method.

CAUTIONPlease make zero degree the speed error correction value by setting ship’s speed 0 knot by using code “21” when you execute this adjustment.

� Relative value alignment The error of the observation bearing that was measured by the gyrocompass is entered as the input value. (Input range : - 180 ° to + 180° ) Input value = (true reading through astronomical observation) - (compass reading) Easterly : “-”, Westerly : “+”For example, if compass reading is “050.0” and the true reading through astronomical observation is “020.0”, the input value is “- 30”.This method may be effective in case of sailing because the standard of absolute heading can be not obtained.

� Absolute value alignmentBy inputting present absolute heading the compass heading is adjusted to the value. Input value = (true heading)This method may be effective in the dock, because the standard of absolute heading can be obtained.

4-20



� Operation with The C.operation UnitSelecting “24 Sync.Manu” from the Operat. MENU and pressing the ENT key, switches to the display showing the manual master compass alignment (as shown in the figure on the right).If the ENT key is pressed, “G1” blinks, and allow to select master compass which is executed manual alignment. Select master compass us-ing up and down key (G1,G2,G1/G2), and press ENT key.If G1 or G1/G2 is selected, the first line “Rel.” blinks and be shifted to Relative value align-ment mode. If G2 is selected, the second line “Rel.” blinks and be shifted to Relative value alignment mode.Select Absolute value alignment (Abs.:0 to 359.9 degrees) or Relative value alignment (Rel.:±180 degrees) using up and down key, and press ENT key. Move cursor to alter place using right and left key, and change sign or value using up and down key.After the value is changed, press ENT key, then input value start blink. If the blinking value is OK, press ENT key. The blinking will be stopped and the master compass will be aligned.If you select G1/G2, second line “Rel.” starts blinking. You can do No.2 master compass manual alignment.

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “24” is executed, the data display indicates “AE,” the gyro heading display indicates “000.0” and the mode changes to relative value alignment setting mode.If the EXT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds, the data display indicates “AH” and the gyro heading display indi-cates the current compass heading and the mode chang-es to the absolute value alignment setting mode. (Switch between the setting modes with the EXT key.)The hundreds digit (digit to be entered) of the display in the gyro heading display blinks.To change the digit, press the SHIFT key and then change the numeric value of the digit by pressing the UP key (relative value: - 180.0 to 180.0 degrees; absolute value: 000.0 to 359.9 degrees).If a negative value is to be entered, set the digit to be entered to the most significant digit (hundreds digit) and press the UP key several times until the data display indicates “AE.” display.After entering a heading, the entered value blinks if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed continuously and is set as the final value.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Rel. +000.0

Sync.Manu

>123.4

126.0 Gyro=G1

Rel. +000.0 123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Rel. +000.0

Sync.Manu

>123.4

126.0 Gyro=G1

Rel. +000.0 123.4

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


4-21



4.2.6 Setting the Master Compass Follow-up GainCOMMAND CODE : 25

Adjust the Master compass follow-up gain when there is a deadband in the follow-up actions and thus follow-up is not smooth or when hunting occurs because the gain is too high.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “25 Fol. GAIN” from the Maint. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the current setting of follow-up gain.Press the ENT key again, then the "G1" blinks. Selecting "G1" (No 1 Master-compass) or "G2" ( No 2 Master-compass ) by the upper and low-er arrow keys and press the ENT key again, then the follow-up gain blinks.Pressing the upper arrow key increases the gain by 5 % (max. 200 %).Pressing the lower arrow key decreases the gain by 5 % (min. 10 %).After entering the gain value, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation. Press the ENT key again. The follow-up gain finally changes to the value you set.

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “25” is executed, the data display indi-cates the current gain (two digits of hundreds and tens) and the digit of hundreds (digit to be entered) blinks.Change the digit to be entered by pressing the SHIFT key and then change the numeric value of the digit to be entered by pressing the UP key to enter a gain value (01 to 20).The figure on the right shows an example of entering a gain of 95 %. (Standard: 100 %)After entering a gain, the entered value blinks if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for an-other 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed continu-ously and is set as the final value.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

100

G G1

.GA N

>123.4

126.0

123.4 100

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

100

G G1

.GA N

>123.4

126.0

123.4 100

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


4-22



4.2.7 Displaying/Resetting Cause of Master Compass AlarmCOMMAND CODE : 26

When an alarm is generated, carry out the following procedure to check the error contents:

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting "26 ErrRef.MC" from the Operat. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the cause of the master compass alarm.The figure on the right shows an example of a display when a gyrosphere failure is generated in No.2 master compass.If an alarm is generated, the master compass (G1 or G2) and an error code are displayed in the first line, and the error contents in the second and third lines. If the first line of the display blinks, it means that the cause of the alarm has not yet been recovered; if it is not blinking the cause has already been recovered. If there are two or more causes of an alarm, the other causes of the alarm are displayed by press-ing the right or left arrow key.When the cause of an alarm has already been recovered, pressing the ENT key cancels the display.

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “26” is executed, an error code is displayed in the data display for the cause of alarm gen-erated and detected in the Master compass.A decimal point is displayed after the least significant digit of the error code. The figure to the right shows an example in which the backup battery voltage failure is being generated.An error code without a decimal point means that the error that caused the alarm has already been rectified, and if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds it will be reset and the error message will disappear.If there was no reason for the generation of the alarm, then “--” is displayed.In addition, if there is more than one cause for the gen-eration of the alarm, the error code with the smallest code number is displayed first and the follow-ing codes can be displayed by pressing the UP key. For example, pressing the UP key may switch the displayed error codes between “40” → “50” → “60” .If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1:CODE= 010

Gyro current

excess

ErrRef.MC

---.-

>126.0

G2>123.4

---.-

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1:CODE= 010

Gyro current

excess

ErrRef.MC

---.-

>126.0

G2>123.4

---.-

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


4-23



4.2.8 Displaying/Resetting Cause of C.Operation Unit AlarmCOMMAND CODE : 27

When an alarm is generated, carry out the following procedure to check the error contents:

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “27 ErrRef.OP” from the Operat.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play showing the cause of C.operation unit alarm.The figure on the right shows an example of a display when no alarm cause in C.operation unit is shown. If there is an alarm occurring, the corresponding error code is displayed on the first line and the error contents on the second and third lines.If the first line of the display blinks, it means that the cause of the alarm has not yet been recovered; if it is not blinking the cause has already been recovered. If there are two or more causes of an alarm, the other causes of the alarm are displayed by press-ing the right or left arrow key.When the cause of an alarm has already been recovered, pressing the ENT key cancels the display.

See section 5.2.4 for the procedure to check the error contents.



GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

No error at

operation

unit

ErrRef.OP

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

No error at

operation

unit

ErrRef.OP

>123.4

126.0

123.4

4-24



4.2.9 Deviation Alarm SettingCOMMAND CODE : 28

This is the function to set a limit value of the deviation alarm that is generated by difference between the current heading and the external heading.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “28 Dev Alrm” from the Operat.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play showing the deviation alarm setting.

The figure on the right shows an example of the deviation limit value to generate a devia-tion alarm (difference of Master compass heading from external input heading) being at 10.0 degrees.

If the ENT key is pressed, the tens place of the deviation alarm limit value blinks to allow the value to be entered.Press the right or left arrow key to change the place of input and press the up or down arrow key to change the numeric value.After entering the limit value press the ENT key. Then the input value blinks, signaling the need to validate the change. If the ENT key is pressed again, blinking stops and the input value is changed.In addition, if the limit value is set to “00.0,” a deviation alarm is not generated.



GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 E 0 .0°

D A

>123.4

126.0

G1 E 10.0° 123.4

G2 E 10.0°

G2GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 E 0 .0°

D A

>123.4

126.0

G1 E 10.0° 123.4

G2 E 10.0°

G2

4-25



4.2.10 Startup Timer SettingCOMMAND CODE : 29

This function restarts the gyro system automatically after a preset time.

CAUTIONDon’t cut off DC power supply for gyro system during timer mode.If the startup time is set to “00”, the system goes into “timer mode” for one minute and the power supply to the gyrosphere is stopped.

In addition, the system is normally started up at the heading that was selected when the power switch was turned off, however, the output heading if the system is started up using the timer func-tion, becomes the gyro heading. At this time, the last selected gyro compass signal is used for output.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “29 W-UP Time” from the Operat.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the startup timer setting (as shown in the figure on the right).

If the ENT key is pressed, the tens place of the startup time blinks to allow a startup time be-tween 00 to 99 hours to be entered.Press the right or left arrow key to change the place of input and press the up or down arrow key to change the numeric values.After entering the time press the ENT key. The input value blinks, signaling the need to validate the input.If the ENT key is again pressed, the system goes into timer mode and the power supply to the gyrosphere is stopped.In timer mode the time until restart is displayed (as shown in the figure on the right).If the ENT key is pressed when in timer mode, the timer is reset and the system can be immedi-ately started.In addition, the system is normally started up at the heading that was selected when the power switch was turned off, however, the output heading if the system is started up using the timer func-tion, becomes the gyro heading.



GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

00[Hour]

W-UP.Time

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Next wake

up to

07.59.29

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

00[Hour]

W-UP.Time

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Next wake

up to

07.59.29

123.4

4-26



� The operation flow diagram of the setting function (C.operation unit) ···1/3

ENT

OMMAND

>Pt1 O

Pt2 O

Pt3 NONE

EXT

DG SEL

ENT

+23kt

AUTO

SPD SET

Ot.MENU

20 EXT SEL

21 SPD SET

22 LAT SET

Ot.MENU

20 EXT SEL

21 SPD SET

22 LAT SET

ENT

>Pt1 O

Pt2 O

Pt3 NONE

EXT

DG SEL

Pt1 O

>Pt2 O

Pt3 NONE

EXT

DG SEL

ENT

>Pt1 O

Pt2 O

Pt3 NONE

EXT

DG SEL

ENT

Pt1 O

>Pt2 O

Pt3 NONE

EXT

DG SEL

ENT

ENT

>Pt1 O

Pt2 O

Pt3 NONE

EXT

DG SEL

Pt1 O

>Pt2 O

Pt3 NONE

EXT

DG SEL

ENT

ENT

+00kt

MANUAL

SPD SET

ENT

ENT

+23kt

AUTO

SPD SET

ENT

ENT

+00kt

MANUAL

SPD SET

+23kt

AUTO

SPD SET

+00kt

MANUAL

SPD SET

+12kt

MANUAL

SPD SET

ENT

ENT

+12kt

MANUAL

SPD SET

ENT

ENT

A

Ot.MENU

20 EXT SEL

21 SPD SET

22 LAT SET

ENT

N 3

°AUTO

LAT SET

ENT

N 3

°AUTO

LAT SET

N 00°

MANUAL

LAT SET ENT

N 00°

MANUAL

LAT SET

ENT

ENT

N 3

°AUTO

LAT SET

ENT

N 00

°MANUAL

LAT SET

S 00

°MANUAL

LAT SET

ENT

N00

°MANUAL

LAT SET

ENT

N2°

MANUAL

LAT SET

ENT

N2°

MANUAL

LAT SET

ENT

ENT

GG1

S.A

t

Ot.MENU

23 S

.At

24 S

.M2

.GAN

ENT

ENT

ENT

G

G1S

.At

G

G2S

.At

GG1

G2S

.At

ENT

R GG1

S.A

t

R GG1

S.A

t S G

G1S

.At

Mi

ium

cas

sii

catio

nm

enu

Ete

rna

ea

inin

put s

eec

tion

Spee

set

tein

or

spee

erro

r cor

rect

ion

Latit

ue

sette

in o

rsp

ee e

rror c

orre

ctio

nAu

tom

atic

ai

nmen

t o

mas

ter c

ompa

ss

From

an

scr

een

Nom

a m

oe

4-27




COMM

AND

ENT

A

Oper

at.M

ENU

23 S

ync.

Auto

24 S

ync.

Manu

25 F

ol.G

AIN

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

Sync

.Man

u

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G2

Sync

.Man

u

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1/

G2Sy

nc.M

anu

ENT

Rel. +

000.

0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1Sy

nc.M

anu

Abs.

000.

0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1Sy

nc.M

anu

ENT

Rel.

+000

.0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1Sy

nc.M

anu

Abs.

000.

0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1Sy

nc.M

anu

ENT

ENT

ENT

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

Sync

.Man

u

Abs.

12

3.4

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

Sync

.Man

u

ENT

ENT

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

Sync

.Man

u

Abs.

12

3.4

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

Sync

.Man

u

ENT

ENT

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G2

Sync

.Man

u

Rel.

+00

0.0

Abs.

000.

0Gy

ro=G

2Sy

nc.M

anu

ENT

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+000

.0Gy

ro=G

2Sy

nc.M

anu

Rel.

+00

0.0

Abs.

000.

0Gy

ro=G

2Sy

nc.M

anu

ENT

ENT

ENT

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+01

2.3

Gyro

=G2

Sync

.Man

u

Rel.

+00

0.0

Abs.

12

3.4

Gyro

=G2

Sync

.Man

u

ENT

ENT

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+01

2.3

Gyro

=G2

Sync

.Man

u

Rel.

+00

0.0

Abs.

12

3.4

Gyro

=G2

Sync

.Man

u

ENT

ENT

Rel. +

000.

0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1/G2

Sync

.Man

u

Abs.

00

0.0

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1/

G2Sy

nc.M

anu

ENT

Rel.

+000

.0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1/G2

Sync

.Man

u

Abs.

000.

0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1/G2

Sync

.Man

u

ENT

ENT

ENT

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1/

G2Sy

nc.M

anu

Abs.

12

3.4

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1/

G2Sy

nc.M

anu

ENT

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1/G2

Sync

.Man

u

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

Rel.

+01

2.3

Abs.

00

0.0

Gyro

=G1/

G2Sy

nc.M

anu

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel.

+000

.0Gy

ro=G

1/G2

Sync

.Man

u

Rel.

+01

2.3

Abs.

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1/G2

Sync

.Man

u

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel.

+01

2.4

Gyro

=G1/

G2Sy

nc.M

anu

Rel.

+01

2.3

Abs.

12

3.4

Gyro

=G1/

G2Sy

nc.M

anu

ENT

ENT

ENT

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel.

+01

2.4

Gyro

=G1/

G2Sy

nc.M

anu

Rel.

+01

2.3

Abs.

12

3.4

Gyro

=G1/

G2Sy

nc.M

anu

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

Sync

.Man

u

ENT

1

1

B

Fro

an

re

en

No

al

oe

Mi

iula

iiat

ion

enu

Man

ual a

lin

ent o

a

ter

oa

4-28




Ot.

MENU

23 S

.At

24 S

.M2

.G

AN

ENT

100

100

GG1

.GA

N

ENT

ENT

100

100

GG1

.GA

N

100

100

GG2

.GA

N

100

100

GG1

G2.G

AN

100

100

GG1

G2.G

AN

ENT

0 100

GG1

G2.G

AN

ENT

0 100

GG1

G2.G

AN

ENT

0 110

GG1

G2.G

AN

ENT

0 110

GG1

G2.G

AN

ENT

BO

t.ME

NU26

ER

.M2

ER

.OP

2 D

A

ENT

G1OD

E01

0G

t

ER

.M

G1OD

E0

0E

tDG

t

tt

ER

.M

ENT

G1OD

E01

0G

t

ER

.M

ENT

Ot.

MENU

26 E

R.M

2 E

R.O

P2

D A ENT

OPOD

E0

0M

1 T

t

ER

.OP

ENT

ENT

ENT

OPOD

E11

0LA

T t

tt

ER

.OP

OPOD

E0

0M

1 T

t

ER

.OP

OPOD

E11

0LA

T t

tt

ER

.OP

N

t

tt

ER

.OP

ENT

Ot.

MENU

26 E

R.M

2 E

R.O

P2

D A ENT

G1G2

00.

0°G1

E 0

0.0°

G2E

00.

0°D

A

ENT

G1G2

00.0

°G1

E 0

0.0°

G2E

00.

0°D

A

ENT

G1G2

10.0

°G1

E 0

0.0°

G2E

00.

0°D

A

ENT

G1G2

10.0

°G1

E00

.0°

G2E

00.

0°D

A

ENT

ENT

G1G2

10.0

°G1

E11

.0°

G2E

00.

0 °D

A

G1G2

10.0°

G1E

11.0°

G2E

00.0°

D A

ENT

ENT

G1G2

10.0°

G1E

11.0°

G2E

12.0°

D A

G1G2

10.0°

G1E

11.0°

G2E

12.0°

D A

ENT

Ot.

MENU

2 E

R.O

P2

D A

2

UP T

ENT

00[

]

UP.T EN

T

00[

]

UP.T EN

T

1[

]

UP.T EN

T

Nt

k t

1

.. ENT

OMMA

ND

From

an

scr

een

Nor

ma

mo

e

Mi

ium

cas

sii

catio

nm

enu

Setti

n o

oup

ai

nD

isp

a/re

setti

n c

ause

o

mas

ter c

ompa

ss a

arm

Dis

pa

in/re

setti

n c

ause

o

C.o

pera

tion

unit

aar

mD

eia

tion

aar

m s

ettin

Star

tup

timer

set

tin

in c

ase

o re

ease

act

orin

cas

e o

reea

se a

ctor

Gro

sta

rts

Nom

a m

oe

4-29



� The operation flow diagram of the setting function (M.operation unit) ···1/2

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

SIF

T▼

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

SIF

T▼

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

UP ▲

UP ▲

COMM

AND

BZ ST

OP

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

ENT

ENT

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

SIF

T▼

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

SIF

T▼

UP ▲

UP ▲

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

ENT

ENT

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

EXT

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

SIF

T▼

UP ▲ GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

SIF

T▼

UP ▲ GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

SIF

T▼

ENT

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

ENT

SIF

T▼

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

ENT

ENT

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

Fro

an

re

en

Nor

al

oe

Setti

n t

e ip

pe

e

or

pee

erro

r or

retio

nSe

ttin

te

latit

ue

orpe

e e

rror

orre

tion

Auto

rat

i

ate

ro

pa a

lin

ent

Man

ual

ate

r o

pa a

lin

ent

Rel

ati

e al

ue a

lin

ent

Abol

ute

alue

ali

nen

t

Pre

or 2

e

Pre

or 2

e

Pre

or 2

e

Pre

or 2

e

Pre

or 2

e

Pre

or 2

e

Pre

or 2

e

Pre

or 2

e

Pre

or 2

e

Pre

or 2

e

4-30



� The operation flow diagram of the setting function (M.operation unit) ···2/2

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

UP ▲

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

UP ▲EN

T

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

ENT

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA DATA

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

SIF

T▼

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

SIF

T▼

UP ▲

UP ▲

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

ENT

ENT

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TADA

TA

DATA

ENT

COMM

AND

BZ ST

OP

Setti

n

ate

r o

paol

loup

ai

nD

ipl

ain

/reet

tin

aue

o

ate

r o

pa a

lar

Pre

or 2

e

Pre

or 2

e

Pre

or 2

e

Pre

or 2

e

Pre

or 2

e

A e

ial

poi

nt i

i

pla

e a

ter

te

lea

t i

nii

ant

iit

o t

e er

ror

oe

Exa

ple

o t

e et

tin

alue

.

1 2

Fro

an

re

en

Nor

al

oe

4-31



4.3 Maintenance FunctionsThis section describes the functions used for maintenance. Do not use these functions in normal state. When command codes of 30’s in the command functions are to be used, enable the mainte-nance functions as shown in section 4.3.1

CAUTIONOnly technicians of the Service department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd. are authorized to implement the operations and other work described in this chapter. However, if for some reason the service department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. permits you to perform these operations, be sure to follow the instructions described in this section.

The maintenance functions include the following:

CommandCode


Execution during

StandbyPage

C M30 ○ ○ Permission for maintenance function ○ 4-3231 ○ ○ Outputting simulated DAC signals × 4-3332 ○ ○ Manual drive of Master compass ○ 4-3533 ○ ○ Manual drive of Repeater compass ○ 4-3634 ○ ○ Resetting gyrosphere running time ○ 4-3735 ○ ○ Resetting log ○ 4-38

36 ○ ○ Initialization of backup memory ○ 4-39

37 ○ ○ Correcting Master compass installation error ○ 4-40

39 ○ ○ Log display ○ 4-43




See the section 3.2 for the operation unit.



NOTEAfter changing the settings, restart the gyro system.

4-32



4.3.1 Permission for Maintenance FunctionCOMMAND CODE : 30

The maintain function is protected by password to reject mis-operation.The command code “30” is the function to check password.

NOTEAsk your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. to implement the operation above.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “30 Password” from the Maint. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play for entering a password (as shown in the upper figure on the right).Press the ENT key again. The ones digit of “00000” blinks, prompting you to enter a password. Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit, and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.After entering the correct password “XXXXX”, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation. Press the ENT key again. If the password is cor-rectly entered, the maintenance functions are ena-bled (as shown in the lower figure on the right).When a wrong password is entered, the ones digit of “00000” blinks again, prompting you to reenter a password.The maintenance functions are disabled by default whenever the power is turned on.

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “30” is executed “00” is displayed in the data display and the tens digit (digit to be entered ) of “00” is blinking.Change the displayed code to “XX” by using the up key to change the blinking numeric value and the SHIFT key to change the blinking digit.After entering the code, the entered value blinks if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed continuously and the maintenance functions are enabled (in which the decimal point is displayed after the least significant digit of the command display).If permission is denied then press ENT key for 2 second, and enter the code again.If the COMMAN D key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.The figure on the right shows an example of displaying the state in which the maintenance functions are enabled.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Please input

maintenance

password.

00000

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Maintenance

command is

available.

>123.4

126.0

123.4

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Please input

maintenance

password.

00000

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Maintenance

command is

available.

>123.4

126.0

123.4

123.4

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


4-33



4.3.2 Outputting Simulated DAC SignalsCOMMAND CODE : 31

A simulated output of any of the following signals can be selected using this function : analog head-ing signal, analog quadrant signal, or analog rate-of-turn signal.

The following graphs show the output span for each analog output.

� Heading (HDG) and quadrant (QUAD) � Rates of turn (ROT1, ROT2, and ROT3)

.

Output Le el

1 2

Output.

.

2.

1.2

1 2

ea in i nal

ua rant i nal

Output Le e..

.

/min /min /min

Rate o turn

.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “31 DAC Dummy” from the Maint.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the simulated DAC sig-nal setting (as shown in the upper figure on the right).

Press the ENT key again. The HDG blinks and an analog signal can be selected.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select a channel from HDG (heading), QUAD (quad-rant), ROT1 (rate of turn), ROT2, and ROT3, then the ENT key. The channel stops blinking and the ones digit of the output voltage level blinks.Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit, and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.After entering the voltage level, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation. Press the ENT key again. The voltage level stops blinking and finally changes to the value you set.The lower figure on the right shows an example of setting the simulated output of 1.23 V for the quadrant signal of the Master compass.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

HDG 0.00 V

DAC Dummy

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

QUAD 1.23 V

DAC Dummy

>123.4

126.0

123.4

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

HDG 0.00 V

DAC Dummy

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

QUAD 1.23 V

DAC Dummy

>123.4

126.0

123.4

123.4

4-34



� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “31” is executed, channel number “1” blinks in the data display, and the analog output signal level of each channel is set to the most recent level (initial value of the simulated output).If the UP key is pressed, the blinking display of channel number (1 to 5 channels) changes.If a channel number is selected and the SHIFT key is pressed, the current output level of that channel is dis-played in the data display and its tens digit (digit to be entered) blinks.Change the digit to be entered by pressing the SHIFT key and then change the numeric value of the digit to be en-tered by pressing the UP key to enter a simulated output level (0.0 to 5.0 V).After entering the simulated output level, the channel number and entered value alternately blink to enable the operator to confirm the value if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds;(1) the entered value is displayed continuously, (2) the output level finally changes to the level you set, and (3) the channel number is again displayed in the data display (blinking).The figure on the right shows an example of setting the simulated output of 3.8 V for channel 2.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.Until the COMMAND key is pressed, the simulated output remains in the set level.

Channel No. Output signal1 Analog heading2 Analog quadrant3 Analog rate of turn : port 14 Analog rate of turn : port 25 Analog rate of turn : port 3

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


4-35



4.3.3 Manual Drive of Master CompassCOMMAND CODE : 32

This function turns the Master compass at a specified speed to check the follow-up system of Mas-ter compass.During execution of this command, the container is released from the follow-up of the gyro-sphere and can be rotated at a specified turning speed. In this condition, the Repeater compass remains stopped.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “32 Rotate MC” from the Maint. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play showing the angular speed setting of “00” deg/s.Press the ENT key again, then the “00” blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the angular speed as follows:

Pressing the upper arrow key repeatedly:Accelerates the speed clockwise: 00 → 01 → 02 → 03 → 04 → 05 → 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30→ 01 → 02 → 03 → 04 → 05 → 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30 01 → 02 → 03 → 04 → 05 → 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30→ 02 → 03 → 04 → 05 → 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30 02 → 03 → 04 → 05 → 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30→ 03 → 04 → 05 → 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30 03 → 04 → 05 → 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30→ 04 → 05 → 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30 04 → 05 → 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30→ 05 → 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30 05 → 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30→ 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30→ 12 → 18 → 24 → 30 12 → 18 → 24 → 30→ 18 → 24 → 30 18 → 24 → 30→ 24 → 30 24 → 30→ 30 30

Decelerates the speed counterclockwise: -30 → -24 → -18 → -12 → -06 → -05 → -04 → -03 → -02 → -01 → 00→ -24 → -18 → -12 → -06 → -05 → -04 → -03 → -02 → -01 → 00 -24 → -18 → -12 → -06 → -05 → -04 → -03 → -02 → -01 → 00→ -18 → -12 → -06 → -05 → -04 → -03 → -02 → -01 → 00 -18 → -12 → -06 → -05 → -04 → -03 → -02 → -01 → 00→ -12 → -06 → -05 → -04 → -03 → -02 → -01 → 00 -12 → -06 → -05 → -04 → -03 → -02 → -01 → 00→ -06 → -05 → -04 → -03 → -02 → -01 → 00 -06 → -05 → -04 → -03 → -02 → -01 → 00→ -05 → -04 → -03 → -02 → -01 → 00 -05 → -04 → -03 → -02 → -01 → 00→ -04 → -03 → -02 → -01 → 00 -04 → -03 → -02 → -01 → 00→ -03 → -02 → -01 → 00 -03 → -02 → -01 → 00→ -02 → -01 → 00 -02 → -01 → 00→ -01 → 00 -01 → 00→ 00 00

Pressing the lower arrow key repeatedly:Accelerates the speed counterclockwise: 00 → - 01 → - 02 → -03 → -04 → -05 → -06 → -12 → -18 → -24 → -30→ - 01 → - 02 → -03 → -04 → -05 → -06 → -12 → -18 → -24 → -30 - 01 → - 02 → -03 → -04 → -05 → -06 → -12 → -18 → -24 → -30→ - 02 → -03 → -04 → -05 → -06 → -12 → -18 → -24 → -30 - 02 → -03 → -04 → -05 → -06 → -12 → -18 → -24 → -30→ -03 → -04 → -05 → -06 → -12 → -18 → -24 → -30 -03 → -04 → -05 → -06 → -12 → -18 → -24 → -30→ -04 → -05 → -06 → -12 → -18 → -24 → -30 -04 → -05 → -06 → -12 → -18 → -24 → -30→ -05 → -06 → -12 → -18 → -24 → -30 -05 → -06 → -12 → -18 → -24 → -30→ -06 → -12 → -18 → -24 → -30 -06 → -12 → -18 → -24 → -30→ -12 → -18 → -24 → -30 -12 → -18 → -24 → -30→ -18 → -24 → -30 -18 → -24 → -30→ -24 → -30 -24 → -30→ -30 -30

Decelerates the speed clockwise: 30 → 24 → 18 → 12 → 06 → 05 → 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00→ 24 → 18 → 12 → 06 → 05 → 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00 24 → 18 → 12 → 06 → 05 → 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00→ 18 → 12 → 06 → 05 → 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00 18 → 12 → 06 → 05 → 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00→ 12 → 06 → 05 → 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00 12 → 06 → 05 → 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00→ 06 → 05 → 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00 06 → 05 → 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00→ 05 → 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00 05 → 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00→ 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00→ 03 → 02 → 01 → 00 03 → 02 → 01 → 00→ 02 → 01 → 00 02 → 01 → 00→ 01 → 00 01 → 00→ 00 00

The figure on the right shows an example of displaying the angular speed of -12 deg/s.

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “32” is executed, the gyro heading display remains the present heading value, and the data display indicates the turning speed (00 deg/s).If the ▼ key is pressed, the Master compass turns clock-wise (CW) and if the ▲ key is pressed, it turns counter-clockwise (CCW).The figure on the right shows an example of displaying the turning speed of 06 deg/s.By pressing ▼ key or either ▲ key repeatedly, turning speed accelerates.By pressing the key for the opposite direction, the turning of Master compass decelerates, stops and then acceler-ates in the opposite direction.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

The following is an example of the sequence of the data display when the ▼ key or ▲ key is pressed repeatedly. Pressing the same key : 00 → 01 → 02 → 03 → 04 → 05 → 06 → 12 → 18 → 24 → 30

Pressing the opposite key: 30 → 24 → 18 → 12 → 06 → 05 → 04 → 03 → 02 → 01 → 00

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

A SPD

12

G G1

R t t M

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

A SPD

12

G G1

R t t M

>123.4

126.0

123.4

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


4-36



4.3.4 Manual Drive of Repeater CompassCOMMAND CODE : 33

This function turns the Repeater compass at a specified speed to check the follow-up system of Repeater compass.During execution of this command, the Repeater compass is released from the follow-up of the Master compass and can be rotated at a specified turning speed.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “33 Rotate RC” from the Maint. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play showing the angular speed setting of “0.0” deg/s.Press the ENT key again, then the “0.0” blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the angular speed as follows:

Pressing the upper arrow key repeatedly:Accelerates the speed clockwise: 0.0 → 0.1 → 0.2 → 0.3 → 0.4 → 0.5 → 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0→ 0.1 → 0.2 → 0.3 → 0.4 → 0.5 → 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0 0.1 → 0.2 → 0.3 → 0.4 → 0.5 → 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0→ 0.2 → 0.3 → 0.4 → 0.5 → 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0 0.2 → 0.3 → 0.4 → 0.5 → 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0→ 0.3 → 0.4 → 0.5 → 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0 0.3 → 0.4 → 0.5 → 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0→ 0.4 → 0.5 → 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0 0.4 → 0.5 → 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0→ 0.5 → 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0 0.5 → 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0→ 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0→ 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0→ 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0→ 2.4 → 3.0 2.4 → 3.0→ 3.0 3.0

Decelerates the speed counterclockwise: -3.0 → -2.4 → -1.8 → -1.2 → -0.6 → -0.5 → -0.4 → -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0→ -2.4 → -1.8 → -1.2 → -0.6 → -0.5 → -0.4 → -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0 -2.4 → -1.8 → -1.2 → -0.6 → -0.5 → -0.4 → -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0→ -1.8 → -1.2 → -0.6 → -0.5 → -0.4 → -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0 -1.8 → -1.2 → -0.6 → -0.5 → -0.4 → -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0→ -1.2 → -0.6 → -0.5 → -0.4 → -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0 -1.2 → -0.6 → -0.5 → -0.4 → -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0→ -0.6 → -0.5 → -0.4 → -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0 -0.6 → -0.5 → -0.4 → -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0→ -0.5 → -0.4 → -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0 -0.5 → -0.4 → -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0→ -0.4 → -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0 -0.4 → -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0→ -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0 -0.3 → -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0→ -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0 -0.2 → -0.1 → 0.0→ -0.1 → 0.0 -0.1 → 0.0→ 0.0 0.0

Pressing the lower arrow key repeatedly:Accelerates the speed counterclockwise: 0.0 → - 0.1 → - 0.2 → -0.3 → -0.4 → -0.5 → -0.6 → -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0→ - 0.1 → - 0.2 → -0.3 → -0.4 → -0.5 → -0.6 → -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0 - 0.1 → - 0.2 → -0.3 → -0.4 → -0.5 → -0.6 → -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0→ - 0.2 → -0.3 → -0.4 → -0.5 → -0.6 → -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0 - 0.2 → -0.3 → -0.4 → -0.5 → -0.6 → -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0→ -0.3 → -0.4 → -0.5 → -0.6 → -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0 -0.3 → -0.4 → -0.5 → -0.6 → -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0→ -0.4 → -0.5 → -0.6 → -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0 -0.4 → -0.5 → -0.6 → -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0→ -0.5 → -0.6 → -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0 -0.5 → -0.6 → -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0→ -0.6 → -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0 -0.6 → -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0→ -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0 -1.2 →- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0→- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0- 1.8 → -2.4 → -3.0→ -2.4 → -3.0 -2.4 → -3.0→ -3.0 -3.0

Decelerates the speed clockwise: 3.0 → 2.4 → 1.8 → 1.2 → 0.6 →0.5 → 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0→ 2.4 → 1.8 → 1.2 → 0.6 →0.5 → 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0 2.4 → 1.8 → 1.2 → 0.6 →0.5 → 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0→ 1.8 → 1.2 → 0.6 →0.5 → 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0 1.8 → 1.2 → 0.6 →0.5 → 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0→ 1.2 → 0.6 →0.5 → 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0 1.2 → 0.6 →0.5 → 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0→ 0.6 →0.5 → 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0 0.6 →0.5 → 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0→0.5 → 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.00.5 → 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0→ 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0→ 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0→ 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0→ 0.1 → 0.0 0.1 → 0.0→ 0.0 0.0

The figure on the right shows an example of displaying the angular speed of 0.6 deg/s.

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “33” is executed, the gyro head-ing display continues to indicate the compass head-ing and the data display indicates the turning speed (0.0 deg/s).If the ▼ key is pressed, the repeater-compass turns clockwise (CW), and if the ▲ key is pressed, it turns counterclockwise (CCW).The figure on the right shows an example of displaying the turning speed of 1.2 deg/s.By pressing ▼ key or either ▲ key repeatedly, turning speed accelerates.By pressing the key for the opposite direction, the turning of Repeater compass decelerates, stops and then ac-celerates in the opposite direction.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

The following is an example of the sequence of the data display when the ▼ key or ▲ key is pressed repeatedly. Pressing the same key : 0.0 → 0.1 → 0.2 → 0.3 → 0.4 → 0.5 → 0.6 → 1.2 → 1.8 → 2.4 → 3.0

Pressing the opposite key: 3.0 → 2.4 → 1.8 → 1.2 → 0.6 → 0.5 → 0.4 → 0.3 → 0.2 → 0.1 → 0.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Angular SPD

0.6 deg/s

Rotate RC

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Angular SPD

0.6 deg/s

Rotate RC

>123.4

126.0

123.4

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


4-37



4.3.5 Resetting Gyrosphere Running TimeCOMMAND CODE : 34

Use this function to reset the running time (hours) of the gyrosphere to zero when replacing the gyrosphere. This operation is required to grasp the accurate running time of the gyrosphere for adequate maintenance scheduling.


� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “34 Reset RT” from the Maint.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play for entering a password.Press the ENT key , then the "G1" blinks. Se-lecting "G1"(No.1 Master-compass) or "G2"( No.2 Master-compass ) by the upper and lower arrow keys and press the ENT key again. The ones digit of "00000" blinks, prompting you to enter a password.Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit, and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.After entering the correct password “XXXXX”, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirma-tion. Press the ENT key again. If the password is correctly entered, the running time is reset to zero.When a wrong password is entered, the ones digit of “00000” blinks again, prompting you to reenter a password.

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “34” is executed, “00” is displayed in the data display and the tens digit (digit to be entered) blinks.Change the displayed code to “XX” by using the up key to change the blinking numeric value and the SHIFT key to change the blinking digit. See the figure on the right for an example.After entering the code, the entered value blinks if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed continuously and the gyrosphere runtime is reset to zero.(in which the decimal point is displayed after the least significant digit of the command display).If command is not available then press ENT key for 2 second, and enter the code again.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 01234

G G1

00000

>123.4

126.0

G2 006 123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

G1 01234

G G1

00000

>123.4

126.0

G2 006 123.4

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


4-38



4.3.6 Resetting LogCOMMAND CODE : 35

This function clears the error history and the command operation history.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “35 Reset LOG” from the Maint. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the log display.Press the ENT key again. The OP blinks and a target unit can be selected.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the unit from OP (C.operation unit) and G1 (Mas-ter compass), then the ENT key.The Err blinks and the log type can be selected.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the log type from Err (Error log) or Com (Command log), and press the ENT key.The ones digit of “00000” blinks, prompting you to enter a password. Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit, and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.After entering the correct password “XXXXX”, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation. Press the ENT key again. If the password is correctly entered, the log is reset.When a wrong password is entered, the ones digit of “00000” blinks again, prompting you to reenter a password.

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “35” is executed, the data display indicates [EL] and press the shift key to select the log type from EL (Error Log) or CL (Command Log).Press the ENT key for 2 seconds.“00” is displayed in the data display and the tens digit (digit to be entered) blinks.Change the displayed code to “XX” by using the up key to change the blinking numeric value and the SHIFT key to change the blinking digit. if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed continuously and the selected log is reset .(in which the decimal point is displayed after the least significant digit of the command display).If command is not available then press ENT key for 2 second, and enter the code again.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

U t OPL E

00000R t LOG

>123.4

126.0 123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

U t OPL E

00000R t LOG

>123.4

126.0 123.4

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


4-39



4.3.7 Initializing Backup MemoryCOMMAND CODE : 36

Use this function to reset all the function settings.

CAUTIONDO NOT carry out the following operation unless instructed by an authorized service technician of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “36 Init. MEM” from the Maint.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play for entering a password.Press the ENT key again. The OP blinks and a target unit can be selected. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the unit from OP (C.operation unit) and G1 (Mas-ter compass), then the ENT key. The unit stops blinking and the ones digit of “00000” blinks.Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit, and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.After entering the correct password “XXXXX”, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation. Press the ENT key again. If the password is correctly entered, the backup memory is initialized when the power is turned on next time.When a wrong password is entered, the ones digit of “00000” blinks again, prompting you to reenter a password.

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “36” is executed, “00” is displayed in the data display and the tens digit (digit to be entered) blinks.Change the displayed code to “XX” by using the up key to change the blinking numeric value and the SHIFT key to change the blinking digit. See the figure on the right for an example.After entering the code, the entered value blinks if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed continuously but the backup memory has not yet been initialized. The backup memory is initialized when the power is turned on next time.(in which the decimal point is displayed after the least significant digit of the com-mand display).If command is not available then press ENT key for 2 second, and enter the code again.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

U t OP

00000

t.MEM

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

U t OP

00000

t.MEM

>123.4

126.0

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


4-40



4.3.8 Correction of the Master Compass Installation ErrorCOMMAND CODE : 37

This section describes the procedure for correcting the error caused when the gyrocompass is not installed in such a way that the lubber line of the Master compass is precisely aligned parallel with the ship’s fore-and-aft line.

� Relative value correctionThe procedure uses the compass heading error as the amount of correction.

Example: 0.56 (Amount of error correction) = 42.56 (true heading through astronomical observation) – 42.00 (compass heading)

CAUTIONThe setting of installation-error by the relative value should be executed, after the last setting value is returned to zero to prevent the setting mistake.

NOTEThe amount of correction for Master compass installation error is determined from the difference between the compass heading detected by a reading when the Master compass is settled and an accurate turn heading obtained through astronomical observation.Perform these measurements when there is no change in the heading, such as when the ship is docked.

� Absolute value correctionIf the absolute true heading can be obtained, such as when the ship is docked, set it as the compass heading. Example: (Input value) = (absolute true heading when the ship is docked)

NOTEWhenever performing error correction, be sure to record the amount of correction in the maintenance record book.

4-41



� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “37 Inst. Err” from the Maint. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play showing the current correction setting.There are two correction procedures: relative value correction and absolute value correc-tion. The figure on the right shows the current setting of 0.5°.In the example of display above, press the ENT key, then Rel. (relative value correction) blinks.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the correction procedure from Rel. (relative: ±180) and Abs.(absolute: 0 to 359.9),and Press the ENT key. Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit: sign (for absolute correction only) → the hundreds digit → the tens digit → the ones digit → the first decimal place

Press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.After entering the amount of correction, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation. Press the ENT key again. The blinking stops and the correction method and the amount is finally set.

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf error compensation is to be carried out using key operation, execute the command code “37.” There are two compensation procedures; relative value compensation and absolute value com-pensation. Pressing the EXT key for 2 seconds switches between these two procedures.

� Example of display for relative value compensation

� Example of display for absolute value compensation

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Rel. +000.5

Gyro=G1

Inst.Err

>123.4

126.0

123.4 Rel. -000.5

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Rel. +000.5

Gyro=G1

Inst.Err

>123.4

126.0

123.4 Rel. -000.5

4-42



� Relative vlaue correction (AE)The error of the observation bearing that was measured by the gyrocompass is entered as the compensation value. The gyro heading display indicates the current value of compensation and its tens digit (digit to be entered) blinks.Change the digit to be entered by pressing the SHIFT key and then change the numeric value of the digit to be entered by pressing the UP key to enter the value of error compensation (- 180.0 to 180.0 degrees).To enter a negative value, set the digit to be entered to the most significant digit (hundreds digit) and press the UP key several times. When correction value is negative, M.operation unit displays “AE.”.After entering the value of compensation, the entered value blinks if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed continuously and is set as the final value.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

� Absolute value correction (AH)If absolute ship’s heading is obtained by the quay-bearing etc. its heading value is input as compass heading.

On the � display, the gyro heading display indicates “container heading + installation error com-pensating value” and the hundreds digit (digit to be entered) blinks.Change the digit to be entered by pressing the SHIFT key and then change the numeric value of the digit to be entered by pressing the UP key to enter the compass heading (000.0 to 359.9 degrees).After entering a heading, the entered value blinks if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed continuously and is set as the final value.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

4-43



4.3.9 Displaying LogCOMMAND CODE : 39

This function displays the recorded log data.There are two kind of log data. The one is error log , and the other is command log.If the number of log data is over the maximum recordable number, the oldest log data is deleted.The maximum number of error log is 100. The maximum number of command log is 1000.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “39 LOG Ref.” from the Maint.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the log display.Press the ENT key again. The OP blinks and a target unit can be selected.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the unit from OP (C.operation unit) and G1 (Mas-ter compass), then the ENT key.The Err blinks and the log type can be selected.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the log type from Err (Error log) or Com (Com-mand log), then press enter key.The latest error log of the selected unit is displayed. The second line indicates the error number (00 to 99), the third line the error code, and the fourth line the time of occurrence.If the error number is 1 or more, or more than one error has occurred, pressing the lower arrow key displays the immediately preceding log, and pressing the upper arrow key displays the immedi-ately following log. A larger error number corresponds to a later error.

� Operation with the M.operation unitIf the command code “39” is executed, the data display indicates [EL] and press the SHIFT key to select the log type from EL (Error Log) or CL (Command Log).Press the ENT key for 2 seconds, then the data display indicates the log number of the most recent log data (0 to 99). (� That is the 31st log number is shown.)

Press the SHIFT key to switch between the log data display items. Log number → Log code → (Lower 2 digits of Log code :at CL) →Upper 2 digits of the generated time →intermediate 2 digits of the generated time → Lower 2 digits of the generated timeIf gyrosphere runtime is reset at replacing of gyrosphere, the error that generated later is recorded by using the new runtime.If the UP key is pressed, the previous data item is displayed.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

NOTEThe maximum number of log which is displayed on M.operation unit is 100.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Unit=OP Err

Num =

Code=

Time=

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Unit=OP Err

Num =

Code=

Time=

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Unit=OP Err

Num =99

Code=080

Time=012345

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Unit=OP Err

Num =99

Code=080

Time=012345

>123.4

126.0

123.4

4-44



�Example of displaying "EL" �Example of displaying log number

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


The display items can be identified by the decimal point displayed in the command display and data display.

Decimal point Display item

Command display Data display

00 00 Log number00. 00 Upper 2 digits of log code00. 00. Lower 2 digits of log code (at CL)0.0 00 Upper 2 digits of generated time0.0 00. Intermediate 2 digits of generated time0.0 0.0. Lower 2 digits of generated time

�Example of displaying an error code �Example of displaying generated time 1

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


�Example of displaying generated time 2 Example of displaying generated time 3

SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


SHIFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO HEADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


4-45



� The operation flow diagram of the maintenance function (C.operation unit) ···1/5

COMM

AND

ENT

HDG

0.00

V

DAC

Dumm

y

ENT

ENT

Main

t.ME

NU30

Pas

swor

dMa

int.

MENU

30 P

assw

ord

31 D

AC D

ummy

32 R

otat

e MC

ENT

Plea

se i

nput

main

tena

nce

pass

word

.00

000

Plea

se i

nput

main

tena

nce

pass

word

.00

000 EN

T

Plea

se i

nput

main

tena

nce

pass

word

.**

***

Main

tena

nce

comm

and

isav

aila

ble.

Pass

word

is

deni

ed.

Try

agai

n.

ENT

Main

t.ME

NU30

Pas

swor

d31

DAC

Dum

my32

Rot

ate

MC

ENT

HDG

0.00

V

DAC

Dumm

y

QUAD 0

.00V

DAC

Dumm

y

ROT1 0

.00V

DAC

Dumm

y

ROT2 0

.00V

DAC

Dumm

y

ROT3

0.0

0V

DAC

Dumm

y

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

HDG

0.00

V

DAC

Dumm

y

QUAD

0.00

V

DAC

Dumm

y

ROT1

0.00

V

DAC

Dumm

y

ROT2

0.00

V

DAC

Dumm

y

ROT3

0.00

V

DAC

Dumm

y

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

HDG

1.00V

DAC

Dumm

y

QUAD

2.00

V

DAC

Dumm

y

ROT1

3.00

V

DAC

Dumm

y

ROT2

4.00V

DAC

Dumm

y

ROT3

5.00V

DAC

Dumm

y

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

AM

enu

isp

ao m

aint

enan

cem

oe

Men

u is

pa

inca

se m

aint

enan

ce

mo

e as

ee

nin

iite

.

Acce

ssin

mai

nten

ance

mo

eO

utpu

ttin

sim

uat

eD

AC s

ina

From

an

scr

een

Nor

ma

mo

e

Ente

rsi

mu

ate

ota

e a

u e

4-46




ENT

Angu

lar

SPD

00

deg/

sGy

ro=G

1Ro

tate

MC

ENT

ENT

Main

t.ME

NU30

Pas

swor

d31

DAC

Dum

my32

Rot

ate

MC

Angu

lar

SPD

00

deg/

sGy

ro=G

1Ro

tate

MC

Angu

lar

SPD

00

deg/

sGy

ro=G2

Rota

te M

C

Angu

lar

SPD

00

deg/

sGy

ro=G

1/G2

Rota

te M

C

Angu

lar

SPD

00 d

eg/s

Gyro

=G1

Rota

te M

C

Angu

lar

SPD

-12 d

eg/s

Gyro

=G1

Rota

te M

C

ENT

ENT

Angu

lar

SPD

0.0

deg

/s

Rota

te R

C

Main

t.ME

NU33

Rot

ate

RC34

Res

et R

T35

Res

et L

OG

ENT

Angu

lar

SPD

0.0

deg/

s

Rota

te R

C

Angu

lar

SPD

0.6

deg/

s

Rota

te R

C

ENT

ENT

G1 0

1234

5hG2

123

456h

Gyro

=G1

Code

=000

00

Main

t.ME

NU33

Rot

ate

RC34

Res

et R

T35

Res

et L

OG

B

ENT

ENT

ENT

G1 0

1234

5hG2

123

456h

Gyro

=G1

Code

=000

00

G1 0

1234

5hG2

123

456h

Gyro

=G2

Code

=000

00

G1 0

1234

5hG2

123

456h

Gyro

=G1

/G2

Code

=000

00

G1 0

1234

5hG2

123

456h

Gyro

=G1

Code

=000

00

G1 0

0000

0hG2

123

456h

Gyro

=G1

Code

=END

G1 0

1234

5hG2

123

456h

Gyro

=G1

Code

=***

**

ENT

A

COMM

AND

Ente

r pa

or

it a

rro

e.

Fro

an

re

en

Nor

al

oe

Mi

iula

iiat

ion

enu

Man

ual

rie

o

ate

r o

paM

anua

l ri

e o

re

peat

er

opa

Re

ettin

rop

ere

runt

ie

Sele

t rot

atin

pe

e

.,

.1,

.2,

.,

.,

.,

1.2 ,

1.,

2.,

.,

.1,

.2,

.,

.,

.,

.,

1.2 ,

1.,

2.,

.

Sele

t rot

atin

pe

e

, 1 ,

2 ,

,

, ,

12,

1,

2,

, 1 ,

2 ,

,

,

,

, 12,

1,

2,

4-47




ENT

ENT

Unit

=OP

Log

=Err

orCo

de=0

0000

Rese

t LO

G

Unit

=OP

Log

=Err

orCo

de=0

0000

Rese

t LO

G

Main

t.ME

NU33

Rot

ate

RC34

Res

et R

T35

Res

et L

OG

Unit

=G1

Log

=Err

orCo

de=0

0000

Rese

t LO

G

Unit

=G2

Log

=Err

orCo

de=0

0000

Rese

t LO

G

Unit

=OP

Log

=Err

orCo

de=0

0000

Rese

t LO

G

ENT

Unit

=OP

Log

=Com

mand

Code

=000

00Re

set

LOG

ENT

Unit

=OP

Log

=Err

orCo

de=0

0000

Rese

t LO

G

ENT

Unit

=OP

Log

=Er

ror

Code

=EN

DRe

set

LOG

ENT

ENT

ENT

Unit

=OP

Code

=000

00

Init

.MEM

Main

t.ME

NU36

Ini

t.ME

M37

Ins

t.Er

r38

res

erve

d

ENT

ENT

ENT

Unit

=OP

Code

=000

00

Init

.MEM

Unit

=G1

Code

=000

00

Init

.MEM

Unit

=G2

Code

=000

00

Init

.MEM

Unit

=OP

Code

=000

00

Init

.MEM

Unit

=OP

Code

=END

Init

.MEM

Unit

=OP

Log

=Er

ror

Code

=**

***

Rese

t LO

G

ENT

ENT

Unit

=OP

Code

=***

**

Init

.MEM

Mi

ium

cas

sii

catio

nm

enu

Res

ettin

oIn

itia

iin

ac

up m

emor

Ente

r pas

sor

Ente

r pas

sor

4-48




COMM

AND

ENT

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

Inst

.Err

Main

t.ME

NU36

Ini

t.ME

M37

Ins

t.Er

r38

res

erve

d

ENT

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

Inst

.Err

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G2

Inst

.Err

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

/G2

Inst

.Err

ENT

Rel. +

000.

0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1In

st.E

rr

Abs.

000.

0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1In

st.E

rr

ENT

Rel.

+000

.0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1In

st.E

rr

Abs.

000.

0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1In

st.E

rr

ENT

ENT

ENT

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

Inst

.Err

Abs.

12

3.4

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

Inst

.Err

ENT

ENT

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

Inst

.Err

Abs.

12

3.4

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1

Inst

.Err

ENT

ENT

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G2

Inst

.Err

Rel.

+00

0.0

Abs.

000.

0Gy

ro=G

2In

st.E

rr

ENT

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+000

.0Gy

ro=G

2In

st.E

rr

Rel.

+00

0.0

Abs.

000.

0Gy

ro=G

2In

st.E

rr

ENT

ENT

ENT

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+01

2.3

Gyro

=G2

Inst

.Err

Rel.

+00

0.0

Abs.

12

3.4

Gyro

=G2

Inst

.Err

ENT

ENT

Rel.

+00

0.0

Rel.

+01

2.3

Gyro

=G2

Inst

.Err

Rel.

+00

0.0

Abs.

12

3.4

Gyro

=G2

Inst

.Err

ENT

ENT

Rel. +

000.

0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1/G2

Inst

.Err

Abs.

00

0.0

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1/

G2In

st.E

rr

ENT

Rel.

+000

.0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1/G2

Inst

.Err

Abs.

000.

0Re

l. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1/G2

Inst

.Err

ENT

ENT

ENT

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1/

G2In

st.E

rr

Abs.

12

3.4

Rel.

+00

0.0

Gyro

=G1/

G2In

st.E

rr

ENT

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel. +

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1/G2

Inst

.Err

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

Rel.

+01

2.3

Abs.

00

0.0

Gyro

=G1/

G2In

st.E

rr

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel.

+000

.0Gy

ro=G

1/G2

Inst

.Err

Rel.

+01

2.3

Abs.

000.

0Gy

ro=G

1/G2

Inst

.Err

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel.

+01

2.4

Gyro

=G1/

G2In

st.E

rr

Rel.

+01

2.3

Abs.

12

3.4

Gyro

=G1/

G2In

st.E

rr

ENT

ENT

ENT

Rel.

+01

2.3

Rel.

+01

2.4

Gyro

=G1/

G2In

st.E

rr

Rel.

+01

2.3

Abs.

12

3.4

Gyro

=G1/

G2In

st.E

rr

MI

ium

cas

si

catio

nm

enu

Cor

rect

in in

sta

atio

n er

ror

From

an

scr

een

Nor

ma

mo

e

4-49



� The operation flow diagram of themaintenance function (C.operation unit) ···5/5

ENT

Unit=OP Err

Num =

Code=

Time=

Maint.MENU

37 Inst.Err

38 reserved

39 LOG Ref.

ENT

Unit=OP Err

Num =

Code=

Time=

Unit=G1 Err

Num =

Code=

Time=

Unit=G2 Err

Num =

Code=

Time=

ENT

Unit=OP

Err

Num =

Code=

Time=

Unit=OP

Com

Num =

Code=

Time=

Unit=OP

Err

Num =10

Code=095

Time=012345

Unit=OP

Err

Num =09

Code=090

Time=001234

Unit=OP

Err

Num =01

Code=151

Time=000012

Unit=OP

Err

Num =00

Code=090

Time=000012

ENT

ENT

Unit=OP

Com

Num =025

Code=1000

Time=001234

Unit=OP

Com

Num =024

Code=2001

Time=001233

Unit=OP

Com

Num =001

Code=2802

Time=000010

Unit=OP

Com

Num =000

Code=3701

Time=000001

ENT

COMMANDMi

ium

cas

sii

catio

nm

enu

Dis

pa

in o

From

an

scr

een

Nor

ma

mo

e

4-50



� The operation flow diagram of the maintenance function (M.operation unit) ···1/4

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

UP

UP

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

ENT

ENT

COMMAND

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFTUP

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFTUP

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFTUP

S IFT

UP

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

UP

UP

UP

UP

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFTENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

ENT

(QUAD)

(HDG)

(ROT1)

(ROT2)

(ROT3)

ENT

Per i ion or aintenan e un tion

Outputin i ulateDAC i nal

Manual ri e o a ter o pa

Manual ri e o repeater o pa

I pa or i in orre t t en t e e i al point i not i pla e .

pre or 2 e

pre or 2 e

pre or 2 e

pre or 2 e

pre or 2 e

Manua ri e o aster co passExample of the display when the ▲ key or ▼ key i pre e .a elerate （▲）：00→01→02→03→04→05→

06→12→18→24→30e elerate （▼）：30→24→18→12→06→05→

04→03→02→01→00

Manua ri e o repeater co passExample of the display when the ▲ key or ▼ key i pre e .A elerate （▲）：0.0→0.1→0.2→0.3→0.4→0.5

→0.6→1.2→1.8→2.4→3.0De elerate （▼）：3.0→2.4→1.8→1.2→0.6→0.5

→0.4→0.3→0.2→0.1→0.0

C annel nu ber Entere alue

4-51




GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

UP

UP

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

ENT

ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

UP

UP

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

ENT

ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFTUP▲

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

UP

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

ENT

ENT

ENT ENT

Pre or2 e

Pre or2 e

Pre or2 e

Pre or2 e

Pre or2 e

Pre or2 ePre or

2 e

Pre or2 e

Pre or2 e

Pre or2 e

i pa or i in orre t t ent e e i al point i not i pla e .

i pa or i in orre t t ent e e i al point i not i pla e .

Re ettin ro p ererunnin ti e

Initiali in ba up e or Re ettin loError lo Co an lo

4-52




GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

EXT GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFTUP

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFTUP

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

ENT S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

ENT ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

ENT ENT

Corre tin a ter o pa in tallation error

Relati e alue orre tion Ab olute alue orre tion

Exa ple o t e ettin alueAE 12 .

Exa ple o t e ettin alueA 2 .

Preor 2 e

Preor 2 e

Preor 2 e

Pre or 2 e

4-53




GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

UP GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

UP

UP

UP

UP

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

ENT ENT

ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

UP GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

UP

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

S IFT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

UP

UP

UP

UP

S IFT

ENT

Di pla in loError lo Co an lo

Pre or 2 e

Pre or 2 e

Pre or 2 e

Pre or 2 e

Lo nu ber

Lo o e

upper t o i ito t e ti e o lo

inter e iate t o i ito t e ti e o lo

lo er t o i ito t e ti e o lo

un er i pla in t e lo ata

Lo nu ber

Upper t o i it o Lo o e

Lo er t o i it o Lo o e

upper t o i ito t e ti e o lo

inter e iate t o i ito t e ti e o lo

lo er t o i ito t e ti e o lo

un er i pla in t e lo ata

4-54



4.4 Generation FunctionThis section describes the functions that facilitate communication with input / output devices con-nected to the CMZ900. The generation functions are divided into two groups : command functions with codes of 40’s and settings with the dip switches. When command codes of 40’s in the command functions are to be used, enable the generation functions as shown in section 4.4.1.

CAUTIONOnly technicians of the Service department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd. are authorized to implement the operations and other work described in this chapter. However, if for some reason the service department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. permits you to perform these operations, be sure to follow the instructions described in this section.

The generation functions include the following:

Command code


Execution during

StandbyPage

C M40 ○ ○ Permission for generation function ○ 4-5541 ○ ○ Setting the follow-up speed for stepper signal ○ 4-56


43 ○ – Setting format of output port ○ 4-5845 ○ – Setting format of input port ○ 4-6349 ○ – Miscellaneous functions ○ 4-69




See the section 3.2 for the operation unit.



NOTEAfter changing the settings, restart the gyro system.

4-55



4.4.1 Permission for Generation FunctionCOMMAND CODE : 40

The generation function is protected by password to reject mis-operation.The command code “40” is the function to check password.


� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “40 Password” from the Generat.MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display for entering a password (as shown in the upper figure on the right).Press the ENT key again. The ones digit of “00000” blinks, prompting you to enter a password. Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit, and press the upper and lower ar-row keys to change the numeric value.After entering the correct password “XXXXX”, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation. Press the ENT key again. If the password is cor-rectly entered, the generation functions are ena-bled (as shown in the lower figure on the right).When a wrong password is entered, the ones digit of “00000” blinks again, prompting you to reenter a password.The generation functions are disabled by default whenever the power is turned on,

� Operation with the M.operation unitExecuting the command code “40” displays “00” in the data display, in which the tens digit (digit to be entered) is blinking.Press the SHIFT key to change the blinking digit, and then change the displayed code to “XX” using the UP key. After entering the code, the entered value blinks if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed continuously and the generation functions are enabled (in which the decimal point is displayed after the least significant digit of the command display).If permission is denied then press ENT key for 2 second, and enter the code again.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.The figure on the right shows an example of displaying the state in which the generation functions are enabled.When it turns on the power supply again the generation function is refused.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Please input

generation

password.

00000

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Generation

command is

available.

>123.4

126.0

123.4

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Please input

generation

password.

00000

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Generation

command is

available.

>123.4

126.0

123.4

123.4

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


4-56



4.4.2 Setting the Follow-up Speed for Stepper SignalCOMMAND CODE : 41

This function sets the limit values of angular speed and angular acceleration speed of stepper-signal.Initial Value Follow-up Speed Angular Limit: 24 °/sFollow-up Acceleration Angular Limit: 140 °/s2

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “41 Stepper” from the Generat. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the current settings for the maximum follow-up angular speed on line 1, and the maxi-mum follow-up angular acceleration on line 2.The figure on the right shows the standard settings.Press the ENT key . The tens digit of the angular speed blinks.Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.After entering the angular speed (00 to 99), press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation.Press the ENT key again. The angular speed stops blinking and the thousands digit of the angular acceleration blinks. Enter the angular acceleration (0000 to 9999) in the same way and press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation.Press the ENT key once more. The angular acceleration stops blinking and the settings finally change to the values you set.

� Operation with the M.operation unitThe command code “41” is executed, the data display indi-cates “SL”, the gyro heading display indicates the maximum follow-up speed. If SHIFT key is pressed the display con-tents changes to the maximum follow-up acceleration and the data display indicates “AL”, the gyro heading display indicates the maximum follow-up acceleration.“SL” : Setting of follow-up Speed Limit (00 to 99)“AL” : Setting of follow-up Acceleration Limit (0000 to 9999)The figure on the right shows an example of displaying the maximum follow-up acceleration of 140 °/s2.If the EXT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds, the left digit of the data display blinks.To change the digit, press the SHIFT key and then change the numeric value of the digit by pressing the UP key.After entering the setting value, the entered value blinks if the ENT key is kept pressed for 2 seconds to enable the operator to confirm the value. If the ENT key is pressed for another 2 seconds, the entered value is displayed continuously and is set as the final value.If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

24 °/s

0140 °/s/s

Gyro=G1

Stepper

>123.4

126.0

123.4

/G2

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

24 °/s

0140 °/s/s

Gyro=G1

Stepper

>123.4

126.0

123.4

/G2

S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


S IFT

RUNEXTFAIL

U P

EXT

COMMANDBZ STOP ENT

GYRO EADING

COMMAND DATA

SET/DIMMER


4-57



4.4.3 Setting Communication Protocol of Output PortCOMMAND CODE : 42

This function sets the protocol of the serial output ports which output the signal to external unit.The gyrocompass system has four serial output ports, and a different communication protocol can be set for each.The gyrocompass system has three serial output ports, (or four serial ports, if the C.operation unit is used) and a different communication protocol can be set for each.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “42 Out Port” from the Generat. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the dis-play for selecting a port number (as shown in the figure on the right).Press the ENT key again. The port number “1” blinks.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the port number (1 to 4). After selecting the port, press the ENT key. The port number stops blinking and the baud rate blinks.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the baud rate (4800 bps or 38400 bps). After selecting the baud rate, press the ENT key. The port number blinks for confirmation.Press the ENT key once more. The port number stops blinking and the communication protocol settings finally change to the values you set.

NOTEThe baud rate of port 1 is fixed to 4800 bps.



GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P=1 4800 bps

P=2 4800 bps

P=3 4800 bps

>123.4

126.0

123.4

P=4 4800 bps

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P=1 4800 bps

P=2 4800 bps

P=3 4800 bps

>123.4

126.0

123.4

P=4 4800 bps

4-58



4.4.4 Setting Format of Output PortCOMMAND CODE : 43

This function sets the communication format of the serial output signal.

The gyrocompass has three serial output ports. Three records can be set to each port. And different format can be set to each port for gyro heading and external heading.The format is set for gyro heading selected.

Port 1to

Port 4

Gyro heading(GYRO)

Record 1Record 2Record 3

External azimuth (EXT) (*1)

Record 1Record 2Record 3

*1: Only format setting of the gyro heading is possible at port 4.

There are two types of format setting: ready-made formats and new formats.

� Ready-made formats:The gyrocompass has several ready-made format.One of the ready-made format (see following table) can be set to each record.

Data Ready-made FormatHeading (HDG) $**HDT, $**HDG, $**HDM, $**THS

Rate of turn (ROT) $**ROT

Heading / Rate of turn (HDG / ROT) $**HRC, $HEHRC, $HCHRC,$PYDKH

See appendix-5 about outline of ready-made format.

� New formats:If ready-made format can not be used for connecting with external unit , it is possible to generate new format.

� Create a new HDG format• Input the address field (Taker ID, Data ID).• Input the number of data field to use.• Input the starting position of data field No.(number of commas) for heading.• Select the using of checksum.(with or without)• Select the types of heading data. In case of the gyro heading output, T:True. In case of the

external azimuth output, M:Magnetic or “ “ : NULL.

4-59



1 2x x x x x

CR LF

Txxx.xFiel Nu ber

C ara ter

ea er

Tal er ID Data ID ea ine ree

Fixe len t

T TrueM Ma neti NULL

C e u

C e uI enti ier

Ter inator

Exa ple o a ne DG or at nu ber o ata tartin po ition 2

� Create a new ROT format• Input the address field (Taker ID, Data ID).• Input the number of data field to use.• Input the starting position of data field No.(number of commas) for ROT.• Select the using of checksum.(with or without)• Select the unit of ROT. (°/min, °/s)• Select whether or not to use the data status field. (ON or OFF)

CR LF

A.

Data IDTa er ID

Hea er

Terminator

Data Fie Num er

Rate o turn

means o turns to port

Fi e en t

StatusA Data a i

Data in a i NULL

C ec sum

C ec sumI enti ier

E amp e o a ne ROT ormat num er o ata startin position

C aracter

/ . e rees/minute

/ . e rees/secon

� Create a new HDG/ROT format• Input the address field (Taker ID, Data ID).• Input the number of data field to use.• Input the starting position of data field for heading.• Input the starting position of data field No.(number of commas) for ROT.• Select the using of checksum.(with or without)• Select the types of heading data. In case of the gyro heading output, T:True. In case of the

external azimuth output, M:Magnetic or “ “ : NULL.• Select the unit of ROT. (°/min, °/s)• Select whether or not to use the data status field. (ON or OFF)

CR LF

T. A.

Hea ine rees

Fi e en t

Data IDTa er ID

Hea er

Terminator

Data Fie Num erC aractor

Rate o turn

means o turns to port

Fi e en t

StatusA Data a i

Data in a i NULL

T TrueM Ma netic NULL

C ec sum

C ec sumI enti ier

E amp e o a ne HDG/ROT ormat num er o ata startin position HDG startin position ROT

/ . e rees/minute

/ . e rees/secon

4-60



� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “43 Out Form” from the Generat. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display for setting the communication formats for serial output ports (as shown in the upper figure on the right).

� Selecting the output port, record number, and typesPress the ENT key, then the port “1” blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the port number (1 to 4)(*1), and press the ENT key. The port number stops blinking and the record “1” blinks.*1: Only format setting of the gyro heading is possible at port 4.

Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the record number (1 to 3), and press the ENT key. The record number stops blinking and the output heading “GYRO” blinks.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the output heading (GYRO or EXT), and press the ENT key. The output heading stops blinking and the data type “HDG” blinks.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the data type (HDG, ROT, HDG/ROT, or NONE), and press the ENT key. When NONE is selected here, no data is output for the selected port, record number, or output heading. When other type is selected, then Already/New blinks on line 4.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the type of format, and press the ENT key. When Already is selected here, then go to “Selecting a ready-made format” When New is selected, then go to “Creating a new format”.

� Selecting a ready-made formatThe display shows the current settings (as shown in the figure on the right) and the current ready-made format blinks.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to se-lect a format. The selectable ready-made for-mats depend on the data type. See the table on page 4-58.After selecting a ready-made format, press the ENT key. The format stops blinking and the cur-rent communication period blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the communication period (20ms (*1) / 200ms / 500ms / 1000ms). *1: Only at 38400bps

After entering the communication period, press the ENT key. The output port, record number, and output format finally change to the selected settings.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Port=1 Rec=1

GYRO

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Port=1 Rec=1

GYRO

HDG

Already

>123.4

126.0

123.4

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Port=1 Rec=1

GYRO

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Port=1 Rec=1

GYRO

HDG

Already

>123.4

126.0

123.4

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P 1 R 1 GYRO

DT

T 1000

>123.4

126.0

123.4GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P 1 R 1 GYRO

DT

T 1000

>123.4

126.0

123.4

4-61



� Creating a new formatThe display shows the current settings (as shown in the figure on the right) and the second leftmost character of the header blinks.Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking character (except for $), and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the letter (A to Z, cyclic).After entering the header, press the ENT key. and communication period blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the communication period (20ms (*1) / 200ms / 500ms / 1000ms). *1: Only at 38400bps

After entering the communication period, press the ENT key. and the tens digit of the number of data items (Dat Num) blinks. Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit, and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.After entering the number of data items, press the ENT key. The display shows the current settings for the selected data type.

· Example of creating an HDG format

The figure on the right shows an example of selecting HDG for the data type.The tens digit of the starting position (Str Pos) blinks. Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit, and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.After entering the starting position, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation. Press the ENT key again. The starting position stops blinking and the designation for use of the check sum (Ck Sum) blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select on/off. After selecting the check sum, press the ENT key. The check sum stops blinking and the True/Mag-netic blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select True, Magnetic, or None, and press the ENT key. The new format (heading) for the selected output port, record number, and output heading is fi-nally confirmed.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P 1 R 1 GYRO

EXXX

T 1000

D t N 00

>123.4

126.0

123.4GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P 1 R 1 GYRO

EXXX

T 1000

D t N 00

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 00

Ck Sum = ON

True

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 00

Ck Sum = ON

True

>123.4

126.0

123.4

4-62



· Example of creation an ROT format

The upper figure on the right shows an example of selecting ROT for the data type.The tens digit of the starting position (Str Pos) blinks. Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit, and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.After entering the starting position, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation. Press the ENT key again. The starting position stops blinking and the designation for use of the check sum blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select on/off. After selecting the check sum, press the ENT key. The check sum stops blinking and the unit blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select a unit (°/min or °/s), and press the ENT key. The designation for use of the A/V status blinks as shown in the lower figure on the right.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select on/off, and press the ENT key. The new format (rate of turn) for the selected output port, record number, and output heading is finally confirmed.

· Example of creation a HDG/ROT formatThe upper figure on the right is an example of selecting HDG/ROT for the data type. The display shows the current settings of starting positions of the heading (HDG Pos) and the rate of turn (ROT Pos), and the designation for use of the check sum. Set all the items as in the case of the HDG and ROT.After selecting the check sum, the display changes as shown in the lower figure on the right. Set all the items likewise. When all of the settings are completed, the new format (heading/rate of turn) for the selected output port, record number, and output heading is finally confirmed.



GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P 1 R 1 GYRO

St P 02

k S ON

°

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P 1 R 1 GYRO

St P 02

k S ON

°

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

A/V = ON

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

A/V = ON

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

True

°/min

A/V = ON

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

True

°/min

A/V = ON

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

1 R 1 GYRO

HDG 01

ROT 03

C um O

>123.4

126.0

123.4GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

1 R 1 GYRO

HDG 01

ROT 03

C um O

>123.4

126.0

123.4

4-63



4.4.5 Setting Format of Input PortCOMMAND CODE : 45

This function sets the communication format of the input signals which are position, speed and heading/ROT sent from external unit.Heading and ROT input:The heading and ROT signal formats can be set to three ports. The ROT signal can not set to dif-ferent port from the heading signal.Position input:The position signal format can be set to one port.Speed input:The speed signal format can be set to one port. The speed signal can be selected from the serial signal or pulse signal.

There are two types of serial signal format settings: ready-made formats (see the table below) and new formats (according to the basic format below).

� Ready-made format:The gyrocompass has several ready-made format.One of the ready-made format (see following table) can be set to each record.

Data Ready-made FormatShip’s speed (SPD) VMVSD, VBW, VHW, VTG

Latitude (POS)(POS)POS)) GGA, GLL

Heading (HDG)(HDG)HDG)) HDT, HDG, HDM, HRC, THS

Rate of turn (ROT) ROT, HRC

See appendix-5 about outline of ready-made format.

� New formats:If ready-made format can not be used for connecting with external unit, it is possible to generate new format.

� Create a new SPD format• Input the address field (Taker ID, Data ID).• Input the starting position of data field No.(number of commas) for speed.• Select the using of checksum.(with or without)• Select the unit of speed. (knot or km/h)

4-64



$1 2

,x x x x x * hh

CR LF

3 4, , ,x.x

Data iel Nu berC ara ter

ea er

Tal er ID Data ID Spee C e u

C e ui enti ier

Ter inator

Exa ple o a ne SPD or at tartin po ition 2 unit NOT

not

� Create a new POS format• Input the address field (Taker ID, Data ID).• Input the starting position of data field No.(number of commas) for latitude.• Select the using of checksum.(with or without)

CR LF

aa .cc

N/S

Data Fie Num erC aracter

Hea er

Ta er ID Data ID Latitu e

Terminator

C ec sum

C ec sumI enti ier

aa e rees

E amp e o a ne POS ormat start position

aa Fi e en t

� Create a new HDG format• Input the address field (Taker ID, Data ID).• Input the starting position of data field No.(number of commas) for heading.• Select the using of checksum.(with or without)• Select whether or not to receive the ROT. If "NONE" is selected, the ROT is calculated from

heading.

CR LF

.

E amp e o a ne HDG ormat start position

Data ie num erC aracter

Hea er

Ta er ID Data ID Hea ine rees

Terminator

C ec sum

C ec sumI enti ier

4-65



� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting “45 In Form” from the Generat. MENU and pressing the ENT key switches to the display showing the current settings for the communica-tion formats for serial output ports. The figure on the right is an example of setting the ship’s speed to port 3, the ship’s position (latitude) to port 2, and the heading to ports 1 and 2.Press the ENT key, then the ship’s speed input port (SPD) blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the port (1 to 3, P, or “-”). Select P for the ship’s speed pulse input and “-” if there is no input for the ship’s speed. After selecting the port, press the ENT key. The ship’s speed input port stops blinking and the ship’s position input port (POS) blinks.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the port (1 to 3, or “-”). Choose “-” if there is no input for the ship’s position. After selecting the port, press the ENT key. The ship’s position input port stops blinking and SPD blinks.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the blinking item and select the data type (SPD, POS, or HDG).

When selecting SPD (for the input ports 1 to 3 only) and pressing the ENT key, then go to “� Cre-ating a ship’s speed format”.

When selecting POS (for the input ports 1 to 3 only) and pressing the ENT key, then go to “� Cre-ating a ship’s position format”.

When selecting HDG and pressing the ENT key, then go to “� Setting serial input ports for heading”.

� Creating a ship’s speed formatThe figure on the right shows an example of selecting SPD for the data type.Already/New blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the type of format, and press the ENT key. When Already is selected here, the current ready-made format blinks on line 3. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select a ready-made format and press the ENT key. The selected format is finally confirmed. When New is selected, the display changes as shown in the lower figure on the right.The second leftmost character of the header blinks. Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking character (except for $), and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the letter (A to Z, cyclic).After entering the header, press the ENT key. All the characters blink for confirmation.Press the ENT key again. The header stops blinking and the tens digit of the starting position (Str Pos) blinks. Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit, and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the nu-meric value.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

SPD P t 3

POS P t 2

DG P1 P2

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

SPD P t 3

POS P t 2

DG P1 P2

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

D 3

V XXX

01

C um O

>123.4

126.0123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

D 3

V XXX

01

C um O

>123.4

126.0123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

D 3

A y

V V D

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

D 3

A y

V V D

>123.4

126.0

123.4

4-66



After entering the starting position, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation. Press the ENT key again. The starting position stops blinking and the designation for use of the check sum (Ck Sum) blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select on/off. After selecting the check sum, press the ENT key. The display changes as shown in the upper figure on the right. and the unit blinks.Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select a unit (Knot or Km/h), and press the ENT key. The new format of ship’s speed is finally con-firmed.

� Creating a ship’s position formatThe figure on the right shows an example of selecting POS for the data type.

Already/New blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the type of format, and press the ENT key. When Already is selected here, the current ready-made format blinks on line 3. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select a ready-made format and press the ENT key. The selected format is finally confirmed. When New is selected, the display changes as shown in the upper figure on the right.The second leftmost character of the header blinks. Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking character (except for $), and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the letter (A to Z, cyclic).After entering the header, press the ENT key. All the characters blink for confirmation.Press the ENT key again. The header stops blinking and the tens digit of the starting position (Str Pos) blinks. Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit, and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the nu-meric value.After entering the starting position, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation. Press the ENT key again. The starting position stops blinking and the designation for use of the check sum (Ck Sum) blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select on/off. After selecting the check sum, Press the ENT key . The new format of ship’s position is finally confirmed.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

SPD P t 3

k t

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

SPD P t 3

k t

>123.4

126.0

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

O 2

A y

G

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

O 2

A y

G

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

O 2

HEXXX

00

C um O

>123.4

126.0 123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

O 2

HEXXX

00

C um O

>123.4

126.0 123.4

4-67



� Setting serial input ports for headingThe upper figure on the right shows an example of selecting HDG for the data type.The display shows whether the heading is input to the serial ports 1 to 3. Either SET (yes) or NONE (no) is displayed.When the port number for heading input blinking, select the port number using up and down key. After select, press ENTER key.When the state of selected port blinks, select the ‘SET’ or ‘NONE’ using up and down key. After select, press ENTER key.If ‘NONE’ is selected, the selecting screen of port number is displayed again.If ‘SET’ is selected, the screen displays a right example figure.

Already/New blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the type of format, and press the ENT key.

When Already is selected here, the current ready-made format blinks on line 3. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select a ready-made format and press the ENT key. The ROT input status blinks on line 4, Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select SET or NONE.After selecting the ROT input status ,press the ENT key. The selected format is finally confirmed.

NOTEWhen the selection of ROT signal is set to “NONE”, the ROT is calculated using received heading.

When New is selected, the display changes as shown in the upper figure on the next page.The second leftmost character of the header blinks. Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking character (except for $), and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the letter (A to Z, cyclic).After entering the header, press the ENT key. All the characters blink for confirmation.Press the ENT key again. The header stops blinking and the tens digit of the starting position (Str Pos) blinks. Press the right and left arrow keys to change the blinking digit, and press the upper and lower arrow keys to change the numeric value.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

HDG Port= 1

Port-1 SET

Port-2 SET

Port-3 NONE

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

HDG Port= 1

Port-1 SET

Port-2 SET

Port-3 NONE

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

DG P t 3

A

DMROT NONE

>123.4

126.0 123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

DG P t 3

A

DMROT NONE

>123.4

126.0 123.4

4-68



After entering the starting position, press the ENT key. All the digits blink for confirmation. Press the ENT key again. The starting position stops blinking and the designation for use of the check sum (Ck Sum) blinks. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select on/off. After selecting the check sum, press the ENT key. The display changes as shown in the lower figure on the right.The ROT input status blinks on line 2. Press the upper and lower arrow keys to select SET or NONE.After selecting the ROT input status ,press the ENT key. The selected format is finally con-firmed.



GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

DG P t 3

EXXX

St P 01

k S ON

>123.4

126.0

123.4GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

DG P t 3

EXXX

St P 01

k S ON

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

HDG 3

ROT O E

>123.4

126.0

123.4GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

HDG 3

ROT O E

>123.4

126.0

123.4

4-69



4.4.6 MiscellaneousCOMMAND CODE : 49

This function executes the ON/OFF setting of following functions.

� Mute functionIf this function is set to ON, the buzzer is made to mute while any alarm are generated. This func-tion is used when the gyrocompass is connected to the center alarm unit.

� Bow Swap FunctionIf this function is set to ON, the heading signals are reversed by 180 degrees while being input the inverse contact signal.

� Operation with the C.operation unitSelecting ”49 Misc.” from the Generat.MENU and press the ENT key switches to the display for Miscellaneous function.Press ENT key again .The MUTE blinks. press the upper and lower arrow keys to select the MUTE function (MUTE) or the Bow swap Function (Bow swap).After selecting a function, press the ENT key.The current settings of the selection blinks. press the upper and lower arrow keys to select ON/OFF.Press ENT key.

If the COMMAND key is pressed, the mode returns to normal.



GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Mute =OFF

Bow Swap=OFF

Misc.

>123.4

126.0

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

Mute =OFF

Bow Swap=OFF

Misc.

>123.4

126.0

123.4

4-70



� The operation flow diagram of the generation function (C.operation unit) ···1/7

COMMAND

ENT

ENT

ENT

Please input

generation

password.

00000

Please input

generation

password.

00000 EN

T

Please input

generation

password.

*****

Generation

command is

available.

Password is

denied.

Try again.

ENT

Generat.MENU

40 Password

Generat.MENU

40 Password

41 Stepper

42 Out Port

ENT

Generat.MENU

40 Password

41 Stepper

42 Out Port

24° /

s0140

° /s/s

Gyro=G1/G2

Stepper

ENT

ENT

Generat.MENU

40 Password

41 Stepper

42 Out Port

A

ENT

ENT

ENT

ENT

26° /

s0140° /

s/s

Gyro=G1/G2

Stepper

26°/s

0140°/s/s

Gyro=G1/G2

Stepper

26°/s

0152°/s/s

Gyro=G1/G2

Stepper

26° /

s0152° /

s/s

Gyro=G1/G2

Stepper

ENT

P=1 4800bps

P=2 4800bps

P=3 4800bps

P=4 4800bps

ENT

ENT

ENT

P=1 4800bps

P=2

4800bps

P=3 4800bps

P=4 4800bps

P=1 4800bps

P=2 4800bps

P=3

4800bps

P=4 4800bps

P=1 4800bps

P=2 4800bps

P=3 4800bps

P=4

4800bps

P=1

4800bps

P=2

4800bps

P=3 4800bps

P=4 4800bps

P=1 4800bps

P=2

38400b

psP=3 4800bps

P=4 4800bps

24° /

s0140

° /s/s

Gyro=G1/G2

Stepper

ENT

Men

u i

pla

o

ener

atio

no

e

Ae

in

ener

atio

n o

eSe

ttin

ollo

up

pee

or

tepp

er

ina

lSe

ttin

o

uni

atio

npr

oto

ol o

out

put p

ort Se

let p

ort N

o.

Sele

t bau

rate

Fro

an

re

en

Nor

al

oe

4-71




OMMA

ND

Gt.

MENU

43 O

t 44

4

ENT

Pt

1R

1GY

RO

ENT

ENT

BA

Pt

1R

1GY

ROP

t2

R1

GYRO

Pt

3R

1GY

ROP

t4

R1

GYRO

Pt

1R

2GY

ROP

t1

R1

GYRO

Pt

1R

3GY

RO

ENT

Pt

1R

1GY

ROP

t1

R1

EXT

Pt

1 R

1GY

RO DG A

Pt

1 R

1GY

RORO

TA

Pt

1 R

1GY

RO DGRO

TA

Pt

1 R

1GY

RONO

NEN

t

ENT

ENT

Pt

1 R

1GY

RO DG A

Pt

1 R

1GY

RO DG N

ENT

P1

R1

GYRO

DTT

1000

P1

R1

GYRO

DGT

1000

P1

R1

GYRO

DMT

1000

P1

R1

GYRO

TS

T10

00

P1

R1

GYRO

DTT

1000

ENT

P1

R1

GYRO

DTT

20

P1

R1

GYRO

DTT

200

P1

R1

GYRO

DTT

00

ENT

1

2

ENT

Pt

1 R

1GY

RORO

TA

ENT

Pt

1 R

1GY

RORO

TN

P1

R1

GYRO

ROT

T10

00

ENT

ENT 1

ENT

Pt

1 R

1GY

RO DGRO

TA

Pt

1 R

1GY

RO DGRO

TN

ENT

3

ENT

ENT

ENT

P1

R1

GYRO

RT

1000

P1

R1

GYRO

ER

T10

00

P1

R1

GYRO

PYD

T10

00

4EN

T

1

1

P1

R1

GYRO

RT

1000

From

an

scr

een

Nor

ma

mo

e

Mi

ium

cas

sii

catio

nm

enu

Setti

n o

rmat

o o

utpu

t por

t

4-72




2

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$HEXXX

T=1000 ms

Dat Num= 00

ENT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$ABCDE

T=1000 ms

Dat Num= 00

ENT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$ABCDE

T= 20

ms

Dat Num= 00

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$ABCDE

T= 200

msDat Num= 00

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$ABCDE

T= 500 ms

Dat Num= 00

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$ABCDE

T=1000 ms

Dat Num= 00

ENT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$ABCDE

T=1000 ms

Dat Num= 03

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 00

Ck Sum = ON

True

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 02

Ck Sum = ON

True

ENT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 02

Ck Sum = ON

True

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 02

Ck Sum = OFF

True

ENT

ENT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 02

Ck Sum =

ONTrue

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 02

Ck Sum =

ONMagnetic

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 02

Ck Sum =

ONNone

5

3

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$HEXXX

T=1000 ms

Dat Num= 00

ENT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$ABCDE

T=1000 ms

Dat Num= 00

ENT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$ABCDE

T= 20

ms

Dat Num= 00

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$ABCDE

T= 200 ms

Dat Num= 00

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$ABCDE

T= 500 ms

Dat Num= 00

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$ABCDE

T=1000

ms

Dat Num= 00

ENT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

$ABCDE

T=1000

ms

Dat Num= 03

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 00

Ck Sum = ON

°/min

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 02

Ck Sum = ON

° /min EN

T

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 02

Ck Sum = ON

° /min

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 02

Ck Sum = OFF

° /min

5ENT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 02

Ck Sum = ON

° /min

P=1 R=1 GYRO

Str Pos= 02

Ck Sum = OFF

° /s

ENT

P=1 R=1 GYRO

A/V = ON

P=1 R=1 GYRO

A/V = OFF

ENT

In

ae

ente

ne

a

DG

an

eto

a

Ne

In

ae

ente

ne

a R

OT

an

eto

a

Ne

4-73




ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

1000

ms

Dat

Num=

00

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

20 m

sDa

t Nu

m= 0

0

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

20

0 ms

Dat

Num=

00

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

500

ms

Dat

Num=

00

4

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$HEX

XXT=

1000

ms

Dat

Num=

00

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

1000

ms

Dat

Num=

00

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

$ABC

DET=

1000

ms

Dat

Num=

03

P=1

R=1

GYRO

HDG

Pos=

00

ROT

Pos=

00

Ck S

um =

ON

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

HDG

Pos=

01

ROT

Pos=

00

Ck S

um =

ON

P=1

R=1

GYRO

HDG

Pos=

01

ROT

Pos=

00

Ck S

um =

ON

P=1

R=1

GYRO

HDG

Pos=

01

ROT

Pos=

03

Ck S

um =

ON

ENT

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

HDG

Pos=

01

ROT

Pos=

03

Ck S

um =

ON

P=1

R=1

GYRO

HDG

Pos=

01

ROT

Pos=

03

Ck S

um =

OFF

P=1

R=1

GYRO

True

° /mi

nA/

V =ON

P=1

R=1

GYRO

Magn

etic

°/m

inA/

V =

ON

P=1

R=1

GYRO

None

° /mi

nA/

V =

ON

ENT

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

True

° /mi

nA/

V =ON

P=1

R=1

GYRO

True

° /s

A/V

=ON

ENT

P=1

R=1

GYRO

True

° /mi

nA/

V =ON

P=1

R=1

GYRO

True

° /mi

nA/

V =OF

F

5

COMM

AND

In

ae

ente

ne

a

DG

/RO

Tan

et

o

a N

e

Fro

an

re

en

Co

an M

oe

4-74




OMMA

ND

BG

t.ME

NU43

Ot

44

4

ENT

SPD

Pt

PO

S P

t

DG

ENT

ENT

SPD

Pt

PO

S P

t

DG

SPD

Pt

1PO

S P

t

DG

SPD

Pt

1PO

S P

t

DG

SPD

Pt

2PO

S P

t

DG

SPD

Pt

3PO

S P

t

DG

SPD

Pt

PPO

S P

t

DG

SPD

Pt

1PO

S P

t 1

DG

SPD

Pt

1PO

S P

t 2

DG

SPD

Pt

1PO

S P

t 3

DG

ENT

SPD P

t 1

POS

Pt

2DG

SPD

Pt

1PO

S P

t 2

DG

SPD

Pt

1PO

S P

t 2

DG

ENT

SPDP

t 1

AM

SD

SPD

Pt

1NE

EXXX

ENT

POSP

t 2

AGL

L

POS

Pt

2NE

EXXX

ENT

SPDP

t 1

AM

SD

SPD

Pt

1A

TG

SPD

Pt

1A

SPDP

t 1

AB

ENT

ENT

POS

Pt

2A

GLL

POSP

t 2

AGG

A

ENT

6

ENT

ENT

6

6

DG P

t 1

Pt

1 NO

NEP

t2

NONE

Pt

3 NO

NE

DG P

t 2

Pt

1 NO

NEP

t2

NONE

Pt

3 NO

NE

DG P

t 3

Pt

1 NO

NEP

t2

NONE

Pt

3 NO

NE

ENT

DG P

t 3

Pt

3SE

TP

t2

NONE

Pt

1 NO

NEDG

Pt

3

Pt

3NO

NEP

t2

NONE

Pt

1 NO

NEENT

ENT

DG P

t

Pt

1 NO

NEP

t2

NONE

Pt

3 NO

NE

ENT

12

ENT

12

11

11

DGP

t 3

ADM ROT

NONE

DG P

t 3

NEEX

XX ROT

NONE

ENT

ENT

10

From

an

scr

een

Nor

ma

mo

e

Mi

ium

assi

ica

tion

men

u

Setti

n o

rmat

o in

put p

ort

4-75




POS

Port

= 2

$HEX

XXSt

r Po

s= 0

0Ck

Sum

= O

N

ENT

10

POS

Port

= 2

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

0Ck

Sum

= O

N

POS

Port

= 2

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

3Ck

Sum

= O

N

ENT

POS

Port

= 2

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

3Ck

Sum

= O

N

POS

Port

= 2

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

3Ck

Sum

= O

FF

ENT 6

HDG

Port

= 3

$HEX

XXSt

r Po

s= 0

0Ck

Sum

= O

N

ENT

HDG

Port

= 3

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

0Ck

Sum

= O

N

HDG

Port

= 3

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

2Ck

Sum

= O

N

ENT

ENT

HDG

Port

= 3

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

2Ck

Sum

= ON

HDG

Port

= 3

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

2Ck

Sum

= O

FF

ENT

HDG

Port

= 3

Alre

ady

$**H

DM

HDG

Port

= 3

Alre

ady

$**H

DG

HDGPo

rt=

3Al

read

y

Alre

ady

Alread

y

$ **H

DT

HDG

Port

= 3

Alre

ady

$**T

HS

HDGPo

rt=

3Al

read

y$*

*HRC

7

SPD

Port

= 1

$HEX

XXSt

r Po

s= 0

0Ck

Sum

= O

N

ENT

SPD

Port

= 1

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 00

Ck S

um =

ON

SPD

Port

= 1

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

1Ck

Sum

= O

N

ENT

SPD

Port

= 1

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

1Ck

Sum

= ON

SPD

Port

= 1

$ABC

DESt

r Po

s= 0

1Ck

Sum

= OF

F

ENT

ENT

SPD

Port

= 1

knot

SPD

Port

= 1

Km/h

6

9

ENT

11

HDG

Port

= 3

NONE

HDG

Port

= 3

$**R

OT=

$**R

OT=

$**R

OT=

$**R

OT=N

ONE

$**R

OT=N

ONE

$**R

OT=N

ONE

$**R

OT=N

ONE

$**R

OT=N

ONE

$**H

DG$*

*ROT

=$*

*HDG

SET

NONE

SET

ENT

11

HDG

Port

= 3

HDG

Port

= 3

Setti

n o

rat

o S

PD

ata

in N

eSe

ttin

or

at o

PO

S at

a in

Ne

Setti

n o

rat

o

DG

at

a in

ne

Setti

n o

rat

o

DG

at

a in

ur

rent

4-76




Gene

rat.

MENU

47 r

eser

ved

48 r

eser

ved

49 M

isc.

ENT

MUTE

=OFF

Bow

Swap

=OFF

Mute

=OFF

Mute

=ON

Misc

. ENT

Bow

Swap

=OFF

Misc

.

Bow

Swap

=OFF

Misc

.

Mute

=OFF

Bow

Swap

=OFF

Misc

. ENT

Mute

=OFF

Mute

=OFF

ENT

ENT

Bow

Swap

=OFF

Misc

.

Bow

Swap=O

FF

Misc

.

CM

iiu

laii

atio

nen

u

Mi

ella

neou

Fun

tion

4-77



� The operation flow diagram of the generation function (M.operation unit)

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

SIF

T

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

SIF

T

UP

UP

COMM

AND

BZ ST

OP

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

ENT

ENT

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TA

COM

MAN

DDA

TACO

MM

AND

DATA

SIF

T

ENT

ENT

COM

MAN

D

GYRO

EA

DING

GYRO

EA

DING

ENT

ENT

COM

MAN

DDA

TACO

MM

AND

DATA

GYRO

EA

DING

GYRO

EA

DING

SIF

TUP

SIF

TUP

COM

MAN

DDA

TACO

MM

AND

DATA

GYRO

EA

DING

GYRO

EA

DING

ENT

ENT

COM

MAN

DDA

TACO

MM

AND

DATA

GYRO

EA

DING

GYRO

EA

DING

COM

MAN

DDA

TACO

MM

AND

DATA

GYRO

EA

DING

GYRO

EA

DING

SIF

T▼

ENT

ENT

ENT

Per

iio

n or

en

erat

ion

oe

Setti

n o

ollo

up

pee

or

tepp

er

ina

lFo

lloup

pe

e li

itFo

lloup

ael

erat

ion

liit

Fro

an

re

en

Nor

al

oe

Pre

or

2 e

Pre

or

2 e

Pre

or

2 e

Pre

or

2 e

Pre

or

2 e

Pre

or

2 e

Pre

or

2 e

Exa

ple

o t

e et

tinS

L : 3

4˚/s

Exa

ple

o t

e et

tinA

L : 2

30˚/s

2

i pa

or i

inor

ret

ten

te

ei

al p

oint

i

not

ipl

ae

.

4-78



4.5 Heading Signal SelectionCMZ900D is composed of two Master compasses. If some error occurs on the system, it is possible to exchange heading signal between No.1 Gyrocompass and No.2 Gyrocompass.And If external heading signal is input, gyro compass can select it. If master compass is damaged seriously, all output signals can be output by using the external signal.

4.5.1 Prohibition of Heading ChangeoverIf there is large deviation between gyro heading and external heading, the switching of heading signal under the condition which autopilot is auto navigation mode has the possibility of causing a rapid course change. CMZ900 can be limited of heading selection.CMZ900 can prohibit the switching of heading by using contact signal (*1). (*2)When changeover of the heading is prohibited, C.operation unit displays "C/O PRF" at the system status display area.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

SPD.MANUAL

+00[kt]

LAT.MANUAL

N 00[°]

>123.4

126.0

O PR

123.4

It means pro i ition o ea in c an eo er

*1: The contact signal for prohibition of heading changeover*2: This function can be used if C.operation unit is equipped and connected autopilot can output signal.

� The commands that cannot be executed during prohibition of heading changeover• Heading selection key (GYRO1/GYRO2/EXT)

• Setting of speed signal (COMMAND 21)

• Setting of latitude signal (COMMAND 22)

• Automatic alignment of master compass (COMMAND 23)

• Manual alignment of master compass (COMMAND 24)

4-79



4.5.2 Gyrocompass Heading Changeover MethodIn this section, it is described about heading changeover between No.1 Gyrocompass and No.2 Gyrocompass.

�Block diagram to change over Gyrocompass

UNCTION UNITM N 1

G ro ea in ele tion eNo.2Ma ter o pa ontrol i nalNo.1Ma ter o pa ontrol i nal

No.1MASTER COMPASS

M M 2

No.2MASTER COMPASS

M M 2

No.1Ma ter o pa

ea in i nal

Repeater erialSerial/Stepper an Analo olta e i nal

No.2Ma ter o pa

ea in i nal

Repeater erialSerial/Stepper an Analo olta e i nal

No.1

No.2

NOR

GYRO SELECTS ITC

G ro ea in an e o ero an i nal Conta t i nal

No.1

No.1

No.1

No.1

No.2

No.2

No.2

No.2

NOR

Serial i nal

Stepper i nal

Repeatererial i nal

Analo olta ei nal DG ROT

Cour ere or er

ROTin i ator

Repeater

Repeater

Repeater

No.1 RADAR

No.2 RADAR

DOPPLER LOG

ECDIS

U AIS

DR

IAS

SIGNALCON ERTER

M BOPTION

et .

et .

ADAPTICONTROLER

ADAPTI / TRAC PILOTSo t are it

Main G roInputAuxiliarInput

S ip ea in i nalIEC 11 2 1

Sele teea in

Un ele te ea in i nalIEC 11 2 1

For DN NAUT A

C ANGE O ERBD ASSY

CONTROL BOX M C 2

GYRO1 GYRO2

GYRO1GYRO2

EXT

EXT

COMMAND

FAILBZ STOP SELECT

ENT

DIMMER / LAMP TEST


C.operation unitM R

There are the following 3 methods as the compass selection of CMZ900D Gyrocompass.

(1) One touch selection with alignment of each compass by the “Gyro heading selector key” on C.operation unit.

(2) Manual changeover selection by the “Gyro select switch” in Control box.(3) Gyrocompass automatic changeover function (Option).

(1) Compass selection by Gyro heading selector keyThe compass is selected by the C.operation unit. Press the “Gyro heading selector key” (GYRO1 or GYRO2) for 2 seconds to select the desired compass.

Changing to No.2 Gyrocompass : Press GYRO key for 2 second.

Changing to No.1 Gyrocompass : Press GYRO key for 2 second.

NOTEThis operation is not possible during prohibition of heading changeover or error-130 .

4-80



(2) Manual changeover selection by the “Gyro select switch” in Control box.If the heading changeover can not be operated because of breakdown of C.operation unit, manu-al changeover function can be used.The compass is selected by the “Gyro select switch” in Control Box .

NOTEAt first, confirm that steering mode is manual steering mode.(Do not change the gyrocompass during automatic steering mode.)

No.1

No.2

NOR

Chan in too. Gyroco pass

Chan in to o. Gyroco pass

G ro ele t it

In i e o t e Control box

In i e o t e Autopilot tan

Set to NOR or nor al tate

NOTEWhen C.operation unit works normally, "Gyro select switch" position should be at "NOR". If "Gyro select switch" is at G1 or G2, error-130 will be generated.

When the compass is selected by the "Gyro select switch", if there is heading deviation between No.1 and No.2 , the heading gap will occur at the following devices. The devices with the possibil-ity that heading gap is generated are being connected with stepper signal. For example ECDIS, RADAR, and CONNING DISPLAY, etc.

(3) Gyrocompass automatic changeover function (Option).It is possible to use this function when meeting the following terms. “The vessel which is applied to DNV NAUT-AW” or “The vessel which is required to equip this function by owner's requirement”.If any error is occurred at selected Master compass, the fail LED blinks and buzzer sounds on C.operation unit and Master compass. And then C.operation unit makes the selected mastercompass heading signal changeover to unselected Master compass heading signal, if error factor is included following lists.

4-81



� Error factors to enforce the automatic change over functionIf any following error(s) is (are) occurred at selected master compass, the heading signal is made changeover to unselected heading signal.

• Gyro-sphere failure (Error Code: 010)

• Inverter failure (Error Code: 020)

• Phase current fall (Error Code: 021)

• Communication failure (Error Code: 070/071/073/074)

• Follow-up failure (Error Code: 050)

• Power failure in MKC327 (System staus: COP1FLT/COP2FLT)

� Error factor to not enforce the automatic changeover functionIf the following error is occurred, the heading signal is not enforced changeover. Because of the following reason.

ERROR FACTOR REASONROM failure (Error Code: 030) If this error is occurred, communication failure is occurred

too. So automatic changeover will be enforced by commu-nication failure. RAM failure (Error Code: 031)

Backup battery voltage failure (Error Code: 040) If this error is occurred, there is no effect to gyrocompass heading accuracy. Operation switch failure (Error Code: 060)

Master compass alignment failure(Error Code: 080) This error is detected at only startup.

Selector switch failure (Error Code: 130) It is impossible to enforce automatic changeover, because gyrocompass is selected mechanically by user operation.

The deviation is greater than “the set value of deviation alarm +1 degree (minimum 6 degrees)”.

If the deviation is large, autopilot will steer the rudder rapidly by jumping of heading. (*1)

If any error which is factor to enforce automatic changeover function is occurred at unselected master compass.

There is error on unselected master compass. (*2)

External heading input is selected Gyrocompass heading is not selected. The rate of turn of non-selected gyro compass is greater than threshold. (Threshold : 200 deg/min.)

There is a possibility that an error is occurring at non-selected gyrocompass.

*1: If automatic changeover is not enforced because of this reason, all of heading signal output except unselected heading signal will be stopped. And following message is indicated with System status display of C. Operartion unit.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

SPD.MANUAL

+00[kt]

LAT.MANUAL

N 00[°]

>123.4

123.4

126.0

O LT

Hea in isp a

S stem status isp a

Menu an ata isp a

In this case, heading signal output will be resumed by selecting unselected Master compass by manually.

*2: If any error is occurred on both Master compass at same time, all of heading output will be stopped.

4-82



4.5.3 External Heading Changeover MethodThe method of external heading changeover is described in this section.

� Changeover to external headingPress the EXT key over 2 seconds or more on the operation unit to switch the signal from gyro compass to external device.

• C.operation unit : key

Press the G1/G2 key to return to the gyro heading.

� Selection of external heading deviceC.operation unit can input the heading from three different devices or less. One of them can be selected. Operate the COMMAND 20 to select the external heading device.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

>Port-1 OK

Port-2 NG

Port-3 NONE

EXT HDG SEL

>123.4

126.0

123.4

See section 4.2.1 for detail of COMMAND 20.

NOTEThe function that select the external heading device can not be executed at M.operation unit.

4-83



4.6 "MUTE" Function of Alarm Sound It is possible to disable alarm sound by setting of command code 49 function. (See the section 4.4.6 about command code 49 function.)This function can be used only when the alarm contacts of Gyrocompass are connected with Bridge Watch Alarm System (BWAS).

(1) The normal display of C. Operation unit.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

SPD.MANUAL

+00[kt]

LAT.MANUAL

N 00[°]

>123.4

123.4

126.0

MUTE

Hea in isp a

S stem status isp a

Menu an ata isp a

(2) Behaviour at system alarm occurrence� When one of following alarms has occurred at gyrocompass, the "Alarm LED and Buzzer stop

key" of C.operation unit is blinked, the alarm factor is displayed with "Menu and data display" or "System status display" and the alarm contact is output to BWAS.

• No.1 Power failure alarm

• No.2 Power failure alarm

• Gyrocompass system failure alarm

• Deviation alarm

� Gyrocompass failure alarm is occurred with BWAS by alarm contact from gyrocompass.

� If the alarm is acknowledge by BWAS, alarm sound is stopped.

NOTECheck the alarm factor with C.opeartion unit, because the blinking of "Alarm LED and Buzzer stop key" is continued until pressing this key.

Blank Page

5-1


< 5.Troubleshooting >

5. Troubleshooting

5.1 Advice for Specific Situations(1) If it is suspected that there is an error in a heading shown by a Repeater compass

or an Autopilot:� Check the settings for the ship’s speed and latitude for correcting speed-error using command

codes 21 and 22. If they are not correct, correct the values.

(See section 4.2.2 and 4.2.3 of this manual.)� Set the ship’s speed to zero and check that indications on the Master compass and Re-

peater compass are the same. If they are not, align the indications of the Repeater com-pass and Master compass.

(See section 5.3.2 of this manual.)� Check the accuracy of Master compass heading with using astronomilcal or physical target

observation. If the heading is not accurate, operate the automatic or manual alignment com-mand.

(See section 4.2.4 and 4.2.5 of this manual.)

(2) If an abnormal sounds can be heard from the Master compass:� Continue to operate the gyro system if there are no errors in indications of the Master and

Repeater compasses.

� When there are errors in indications of the Master and Repeater compasses, use the external azimuth selector switch to set the operation of the system so that the azimuth sensor is se-lected to “external azimuth.”

(See section 4.5 of this manual.) *: In either case, Ask your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd..

(3) If you desire to know the gyrosphere running time:This can be displayed using the command code 13. However, a correct value cannot be obtained unless the running time was reset when the gyrosphere was replaced.

(See section 4.1.4 of this manual.)

(4) If you desire to know the phase current of the gyrosphere:This can be displayed using the command code 15.


(5) If you desire to implement automatic re-startup using the timer:The timer can be set using the command code 29.


(6) There is a possibility that abnormality has occurred on the selected device.(See section 4.5.1 of this manual.)

5-2



5.2 AlarmThe gyrocompass system generates an alarm in the following situations.

• The units break down.• A communication error is generated.• etc.

This section describes that confirm method and action method of the error content.

YES

NO

Di pla e t e error ontent C.ope Pu COMMAND e to i pla nor al o e.

Soun in t e bu er Pu BZSTOP e to top t e bu er oun .

Blin in t e alar LED Alar a tor an elle

Li tin t e alar LED Re o er

Turnin o t e alar LED

Alar a tor

Appen e to t e urrent alar li t Operate t e COMMAND 2 /2 to on ir .

Re or e on t e error lo Operate t e COMMAND to re er t e error lo .

Alareneration

5.2.1 The Display When Alarm has been GeneratedThe gyrocompass system generates an alarm when an error has been generated.The buzzer sounds and the alarm LED blinks at that time.C.operation unit displays cause of alarm at the general display area.The right figure shows an example that “GYRO SPHERE FAILURE” is generated.The buzzer is stopped by pushing the BZ STOP key. If cause of alarm still remains when BZ STOP key pushed, the alarm LED is kept turning on.If cause of alarm is already cleared when BZ STOP key pushed, the alarm LED turns off.If two or more alarms cause, push the right or left arrow key to display other error factors.Push the COMMAND key, to display “NORMAL MODE”.

The detail of error code is described in section 5.2.4.

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

GYRO FAILED!

G1:CODE= 010

Gyro current

excess

---.-

>126.0

HDG FLT

123.4

GYRO 1

GYRO 2

EXT

GYRO FAILED!

G1:CODE= 010

Gyro current

excess

---.-

>126.0

HDG FLT

123.4

5-3



5.2.2 Confirmation of Error FactorOperate the command 26 or 27 to confirm the error factors.The error code is displayed by operating above command. If the cause of alarm is already cancelled, it is possible to delete from error list.The operation of command 26 is described in section 4.2.6. The operation of command 27 is described in section 4.2.7.The contents of error , presumption causes and action method are described in section 5.2.4.

5.2.3 Cancellation of AlarmThe buzzer is stopped by pushing the BZ STOP key. If cause of alarm still remains when BZ STOP key pushed, the alarm LED is kept turning on.If cause of alarm is already cleared when BZ STOP key pushed, the alarm LED turns off. The alarm LED keeps light on until cause of alarm will be cancelled.To cancel the alarm, refer to the section 5.2.4. The causes of alarm are classified as follows.

� Cancelled by system restorationWhen the alarm is generated by temporarily stopping the signal which communicates external device, the alarm will be cancelled by restoration of signal communication.

� Cancelled by checking the power supply, connected deviceWhen the alarm is generated by down of the power supply or abnormality of connected device, the alarm will be cancelled by turning on power supply or restarting the connected device.

� Cancelled by manual operation or changing the settingThere are some cases that to cancel the cause of alarm by manual operation or changing the set-ting. ex) ERROR CODE : 080 , 151

� Cancelled by exchanging to spare partsIf a fuse is cut, the alarm will be cancelled by exchanging to spare fuse.

� The service call is necessary When a serious breakdown occurs, the service call is necessary for repair. Ask your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. to repair or maintain.

5-4



5.2.4 Presumption Causes and CountermeasuresIf an alarm is generated , confirm the error code and countermeasure with referring the below table.The operation of command function is described in chapter 4.If it is not possible to countermeasure by using following method, ask your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd.

� Error code listThe number described in [ ] is an error code for the M.operation unit.

Error code Error Contents Presumption Cause Countermeasure

10's : Gyroshere failure

010[10]

Gyrosphere failurePhase current of 350 mA or more continued for 20 min. or more. (40 min. for startup)

The phase current become large by abnormality of gyro sphere.

The gyro sphere replacement is nec-essary. (*1)

[Correspondence method under navigation] • If the autopilot is used in auto naviga-

tion mode, switch to the hand navi-gation mode according to the situa-tion. After changing the navigation mode, switch the gyrocompass to the normal one. (*5)

• If the external heading device is con-nected, switch to the external device. (*2)

20's : Inverter failure

020[20]

Inverter failurePhase current of 75 mA or less continued for 3 seconds. (no inverter output voltage)

• Power unit (inverter section) fail-ure

• Wiring failure

• Check the connectors of container assy. (*1)

• Check the cable connections of M.Main BD ASSY, M.PWM INV BD ASSY, M.PS BD ASSY and TRANS ASSY of mastercompass.

[Correspondence method under navigation]• If the autopilot is used in auto naviga-

tion mode, switch to the hand navi-gation mode according to the situa-tion. After changing the navigation mode, switch the gyrocompass to the normal one. (*5)

• If the external heading device is con-nected, switch to the external device. (*2)

021[21]

Low phase currentPhase current of 75 mA or less continued for 3 seconds. (with inverter output voltage)

• No phase current flow due to gy-rosphere failure.

• Wiring failure

30's : Memory Failure (The memory test is executed at start up)

030[30]

ROM failureROM check sum failure is generated.

Memory element failure Replace the main-assembly unit. (*1)

031[31]

RAM failureRAM read/write failure is generated.

Memory element failure

*1: Ask your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. to repair or maintain. Only technicians of the Service department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. are authorized to maintain. However, if for some reason the service department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. permits you to perform maintenance or exchanging the parts , obey instructions and execute it.

*2: Take enough care to navigation in consideration of the characteristic of the external heading device.*3: Repair the system as soon as possible.*4: It is limited that this alarm is generated , when the external signal is input to mastercompass.*5: If the gyrocompass has automatic heading changeover function (OPTION), the gyrocompass is switched automatically.

5-5




40's : Backup battery voltage failure

040[40]

Backup battery voltage fail-ure.

Voltage of memory back-up battery falls to 2.5 V or less.

Memory backup battery dissipa-tion

Replace the main-assembly unit. (*1)

[Correspondence method under navigation]If the power supply is supplied continu-ously, all set values are kept.However if the power supply is stopped, various settings are initialized. (*3)

50's : Follow-up failure

050[50]

Follow-up failureDeviation of 0.5° or more is generated for 12 sec-onds or more.

• The follow-up gain is set with large value.

• Follow-up mechanism failure• Motor drive circuit failure• Wiring failure

• Execute command 23 or 24 to restart following-up

• Decrease the follow-up gain using command 25.

• Replace the main-assembly unit.• Replace the follow up mechanism.• Replace the container.(*1)• Check wiring and connections.

60's : Operation panel switch failure

060[60]

Switch failureON continuously for 60 seconds or more

Switch failure of the operation unit.

• Replace the operation unit. (*1)

[Correspondence method under navigation]There is no effect for heading detect, displaying and signal output, but there is a possibility that various operations cannot be done.

70's : Communication failure between C.operation unit and master compass

070[70]

Communication failure • Breakdown of C.operation unit• Breakdown of PWB of master

compass broke • The defectiveness of wiring be-

tween the C.operation unit and the master.

• Check the cable connections of each units.

• Exchange the PWBs or cable assy in master compass.

(M.TERMINAL BD ASSY, M.MAIN BD ASSY, C.MAIN BD ASSY, C.TERMINAL BD ASSY) (*1)

071[71]

Invalid data • The defectiveness of wiring be-tween the C.operation unit and the master compass.

• The Malfunction by signal noise.


• Check the connection of FG line.

073

No.2 master compass com-munication failure

• Breakdown of C.operation unit• Breakdown of PWB of master

compass broke • The defectiveness of wiring be-

tween the C.operation unit and the master.


• Exchange the PWBs or cable assy in master compass.

(M.TERMINAL BD ASSY, M.MAIN BD ASSY, C.MAIN BD ASSY, C.TERMINAL BD ASSY) (*1)

074

No.2 master compass invalid data

• The defectiveness of wiring be-tween the C.operation unit and the master compass.

• The Malfunction by signal noise.


• Check the connection of FG line.



5-6




80's : Automatic master compass alignment failure (Null point detection failure)

080[80]

Master compass alignment failure (Zero-point detection failure)

• Breakdown of photo sensor• Wiring failure of sensor connec-

tion

• Exchange the photo sensor assy.(*1)• Check the connection of sensor.

[Correspondence method under navigation]If it is necessary to align the master compass, operate the command 24 for manual alignment.

90's : External heading input failure

090[90]

External heading inputTime out

More than 10 seconds interrup-tion of external heading signal

• Check the activation and setting of the connected device.

• Check the setting of the C.operation unit.

• Check the wiring connection.

091[91]

Protocol error of external signal (*4)

The overrun error , framing error, or parity error occurs in external signal.

• Check the wiring connection. (polar-ity of signal, etc.)

• Check the baud rate and hardware protocols.

092[92]

Check sum error of external heading signal

• The Malfunction by signal noise.• The disagreement of calculation

of check sum between gyro and connected device.

• Check the cable connections of each units. (Especially the connection of FG line.)

• Check the setting of connected de-vice.

093[93]

Data invalid of external heading signal

The system failure of connected device.

Repair the connected device.

094[94]

External ROT input time out

More than 10 seconds interrup-tion of external ROT signal




096[96]

Check sum error of external ROT signal





097[97]

Data invalid of external ROT signal



100's : Ship's speed input failure (It is limited that this alarm is generated , when automatic speed error correction)

100

Speed signal time out More than 10 seconds interrup-tion of speed signal




102

Check sum error of speed signal





103 Data invalid of speed signal





5-7




110's : Ship's position input failure (It is limited that this alarm is generated , when automatic speed error correction)

110

Latitude signal time out More than 10 seconds interrup-tion of latitude signal




112

Check sum error of latitude signal





113 Data invalid of latitude sig-nal



120's : Serial input port protocol error

120 Protocol error of serial sig-nal input port 1

The overrun error, framing error , or parity error occurs in serial input signal.

• Check the wiring connection. (polar-ity of signal, etc.)

• Check the baud rate and hardware protocols. (*1)121 Protocol error of serial sig-

nal input port 2

122 Protocol error of serial sig-nal input port 3

130’s : Selector switch failure

130Selector switch failure The selector switch of the change-

over unit is positioned out of “NOR”.

Select the selector switch position to “NOR”.

140’s : Alignment failure

140Alignment failure Heading outputs of No. 1 and No.

2 master compasses do not align.Check wiring and connection between the operation unit and master com-passes.

150's : Deviation alarm (See section 4.2.9 about the setting of threshold of deviation alarm.)

150Deviation alarm (GYRO1-GYRO2)

The heading difference between gyro 1 heading and gyro 2 heading exceeded the alarm value.

• Check the propriety of threshold value.• Check the master compass and ex-

ternal heading device. If gyro com-pass outputs abnormal heading , ask your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. If ex-ternal heading outputs abnormal heading, ask the manufacture serv-ice department.

[Correspondence method under navigation]If the autopilot is used in auto naviga-tion mode, switch to the hand naviga-tion mode according to the situation.

151Deviation alarm (GYRO1-External)

The heading difference between gyro 1 heading and external azi-muth exceeded the alarm value.

152

Deviation alarm (GYRO2-External)

The heading difference between gyro 2 heading and external azi-muth exceeded the alarm value.



5-8



5.3 Repeater Compass Error Contents and Countermeasures

5.3.1 The Display when Alarm has been Generated on the Repeater Compass

The fail indicator LED blinks or lights when repeater compass detects failure.The blink cycle of the fail indicator LED indicates the error content of repeater compass.

111

121

11

1111221

22

22

22

22

2

1

2

1 2

1

2

S

FAIL

RUN SYNC DIMMER

ai n icator

ai n icator

unction o M Steerin epeater Co pass M

� Repeater compass error contents and countermeasure

Fail indicator LED condition Error contents Causes Countermeasure

Light off ○ Normal

Light on ● CPU RAM failure or ROM failure

Broken down CPU board in Junction Box

Exchange CPU board (*1)

Blink Light on one time per1.6 seconds.

Null point detection failure Broken down optical sen-sor inside of Repeater compass

Exchange optical sensor (It is possible to adjust null point by manually) (*1)

●○○●○○●○○ │1.6 sec│↔

The snapping of a wire for Optical sensor

Restore connection(It is possible to adjust null point by manually) (*1)

Light on two times per1.6 seconds.

Communication failurebetween Master compass and Repeater compass

• Not connected signal wire

• The snapping of signal wire

• Connected signal wire inversely

Restore connection

●●○●●○●●○ │1.6 sec│↔

●: Light on ○: Light off


5-9



5.3.2 Procedure for Aligning Repeater Compass IndicationThe Repeater compass indication is automatically aligned with the Master compass indication when the power is turned on. In general, no other alignment is required. However, it is advisable to check the Master compass display and the Repeater compass indication before departing from a port to avoid possible accident. If the Master compass display and the Repeater compass indication match, alignment of indication is not necessary.

NOTECheck the readings of the Repeater compass card when the ship’s speed is set to “0.” If a speed-error correction is performed, the Master compass card reading will not agree with the Repeater compass card reading.

� Procedure using the zero adjustment switchIf the Repeater compass indication shifts from the Master compass display, use the zero adjustment switch to align the indication.

Press this switch for 2 seconds or more. The Repeater compass card turns and the zero of the compass card is aligned with the pointer to correct the shift.

Then, the Repeater compass follows up the received value.If an error due to zero point photo-sensor failure is generated, use the procedure described below to align the indication.

� Procedure in the case where the zero point photo-sensor failsIt is possible to adjust null point by manually when null point detection failure is occurred. The procedure is as follows: (1) Push Zero adjustment switch more than 2 seconds. (The Repeater compass card will turn round and stop after 5 seconds.) At this time Fail indicator LED shows null point detection failure. (2) Push Zero adjustment switch. (The Repeater compass card will turn round rapidly)(3) Push Zero adjustment switch when the outer Repeater compass card (360 degrees/

revolution) value go below 10 degrees. (Rough adjustment) The compass card will turn round slowly.(4) Push Zero adjustment switch when the compass needle agree with the 0 scale of inner

Repeater compass card. After about 3 seconds the Fail indicator LED will be turned off and the Repeater compass

shows same heading as Master compass heading. (Fine adjustment)

If you failed manual null point adjustment, try again the above procedure.

Blank Page

6-1


< 6.Specifications >

6. Specifications

6.1 Performance and Specifications6.1.1 Power Supply

Main power supply 100 /110/115/220 V AC 50/60 Hz Backup power supply 24 V DC +30 %, -10 % Power consumption (24 V DC)

At startup: Approx. 10 A + 0.35 A × number of repeater compassesSteady sate: Approx. 7 A + 0.35 A × number of repeater compasses

Power consumption (AC) At startup: Approx. 250 VA + 12 VA × number of repeater compassesSteady state: Approx. 200 VA + 12 VA VA + 12 VAVA + 12 VA × number of repeater compasses

6.1.2 Input SignalShip's speed signal for speed-error correction

Number of circuits 1 circuit Signal form 200 pulses/n mile,

or serial IEC61162-1Latitude signal for speed-error correction

Number of circuits 1 circuit Signal form Serial IEC61162-1

Heading signal Number of circuits 3 circuitSignal form Serial IEC61162-1

Alarm buzzer stop signal: 1 circuit, contactBow swap contact input 1 circuit, contact C/O PRF singnal input 1 circuit, contact

6.1.3 Output SignalRepeater compass signal Number of circuits 8 circuits

Signal form Serial IEC61162-1 sentenceStepper heading signal Number of circuits 4 circuit, capacity 1 A

Signal form 24 V DC, 3-bit gray code, 1/6 degree/stepSerial heading/rate-of-turn signal

Number of circuits 3 circuits, individual generation possibleSignal form Serial IEC61162-1 / -2

Analog heading andquadrant signals

Number of circuits 1 circuit each Signal form 0 to 5 V DC

Analog rate-of-turn signal Number of circuits 3 circuits, individual range setting possibleSignal form 0 to 5 V DC; 30, 100, 120, and 300 deg/min

Serial ship's speed input distribution Output

Number of circuits 1 circuit

Signal form serial IEC61162-1No.1/No.2 Volt-free signal:

Number of circuits 1 circuit each, contactSignal status "Open" or "closed" when no voltage is applied

No.1/No.2 Gyro failure signal

Number of circuits 1 circuit each, contactSignal status "Open" or "closed" when gyro fails

(No.1/No.2/EXT)Heading selection signal

Number of circuits 1 circuit each, contactSignal status Closed when each sensor is selected

6-2



No.1/No.2Gyro running signal

Number of circuits 1 circuit each , ContactSignal status "Open" or "closed" when running

System fail signal Number of circuits 1 circuit, contactSignal status "Open" or "closed" when system fails

Deviation Alarm Number of circuits 1 circuit, contactSignal status "Open" or "closed" when abnormal

Buzzer stop Number of circuits 1 circuit, contact

6.1.4 Setting Time and Accuracy

Settling time Within 5 hours (The gyro can actually be used after about 2 hours from start.)North-pointing accuracy Within ± 0.25 °/cos φ (φ being the latitude at that location)Follow-up accuracy 0.1 ° or lessMaximum follow-up speed 30 deg/s

6.1.5 Environmental Specifications (Normal Operating Conditions)

Allowable roll and pitch 40 ° for both rolling and pitching

Allowable vibration 3 mm p-p or less for 8 to 8.3 Hz

0.35 mm p-p or less for 8.3 to 25 Hz

0.1 mm p-p or less for 25 to 50 Hz

Operating temperature range

- 15 °C to + 55 °C- 10 °C to + 50 °C (Master Compass)- 25 °C to + 55 °C (Bearing Repeater Compass)

6-3



6.1.6 External Input /Output Signal Specifications and Circuits

Signal Name Abbreviation Circuit / signal SpecificationsSerial signal input RD1A

RD1B

RD2ARD2B

RD3ARD3B

CurrentRe u atorDio e.

CRDR

RD A

RD B

• Number of connectable circuits: 3 • Data contents: Heading, ship's speed and latitude• Receiving circuit: Photo-coupler• Transmission format: Start-stop serial signal• Transmission rate: 4800 bps.• Data format: See Appendix

Ship's speed pulse input

LPPLPN/BSC

. KΩ

KΩ

. μFLPP

LPN

• Number of connectable circuits: 1• Pulse rate: 200 pulses/n mile• Signal format: Open collector (photo-coupler) or volt-free contact

Repeater compassheading output

24VOUTGNDSD1RASD1RB

24VOUTGNDSD2RASD2RB

•••

24VOUTGNDSD8RASD8RB

RS Dri er

SD RA

SD RB

GND

• Number of connectable circuits : 8 • Transmission system : RS422 (use a driver circuit equivalent to RS422A

or RS485)• Transmission format : Start-stop serial signal• Transmission rate : 4800 / 9600 bps• Character configuration : Start bit 1, Data bit 8, Stop bit 1, Parity None• Data format and Transmission period:

Format Transmission period RemarksPYDKH 1 sec only at 9600 bps**HRC 1 sec only at 9600 bpsHEHDT 50 ms

6-4



Signal Name Abbreviation Circuit / signal Specifications

Stepper heading output

REF1SS11SS21SS31COM

REF2SS12SS22SS32COM

REF3SS13SS23SS33COM

REF4SS14SS24SS34COM

REF

SS

SS

SS

Recei erMastercompass

DC REF

SS

SS

SS

Recei erMastercompass

DC

A armCir.

Com.

irin Contro circuit irin Contro circuit

Signal format

REF SS

REF SS

REF SS

DC

DC

DC

//

• Number of connectable circuits : 4 • COM : 0 V (circuit GND)• REF output voltage : 24 V DC, 35 V DC (Optional)• REF output current : 1 A max. • Output form : Open collector output (24 V DC 3-bit gray code)

Serial signal output SD1ASD1BSG

SD2ASD2BSG

SD3ASD3BSG

RS Dri er

SD A

SD B

SG

• Number of connectable circuits : 1 (IEC61162-1), 2 (IEC61162-1/-2 selectable)• Transmission system : RS422 (use a driver circuit equivalent to RS422A

or RS485)• Transmission format : Start-stop serial signal• Transmission rate : To be selected from 4800 / 38400 bps.• Data format : IEC61162-1 / -2

Unselected gyro heading signal output

SDEASDEBSG

RS Dri er

SDEA

SDEB

SG

• Number of connectable circuits : 1(IEC61162-1/-2 selectable)• Transmission system : RS422 (use a driver circuit equivalent to RS422A

or RS485)• Transmission format : Start-stop serial signal• Transmission rate : To be selected from 4800 / 38400 bps.• Data format : IEC61162-1 / -2

6-5




Analog headingquadrant signaloutput

HDGCOM

QUDCOM

LF KΩ

. μF

KΩHDG or UD

COM

Signal format

.

Output Le e

Output.

.

.

.

Hea in si na

ua rant si na

• Number of connectable circuits: 1 each• COM: 0 V (circuit GND)• Output voltage: 0 to +5 V DC• Output resolution: 2.5 mV• Output impedance: 2 kΩ max.• Recommended input impedance of connected unit: 500 kΩ min.• Output accuracy: ±1% FS (at 25°C)

Analog rate-of-turn output

ROT1COM

ROT2COM

ROT3COM

LF KΩ

. μF

KΩROT

COM

Signal FormatOutput Le e

.

.

.

/min /min /min

Rate o turn

.

• Number of connectable circuits: 3• COM: 0 V (circuit GND)• Output voltage: 0 to + 5 V DC• Output resolution: 2.5 mV• Output impedance: 2 kΩ max.• Recommended input impedance of connected unit: 500 kΩ min• Output accuracy: ±1 % FS (at 25 °C)

6-6




Serial Ship’s Speed Signal Distribution Output

RD1RARD1RBSG

RS Dri erRD RA

RD RB

SG

• Number of connectable circuits: 1• Transmission system: RS422 (use a driver circuit equivalent to RS422A or RS485)• Transmission format: Start-stop serial signal• Transmission rate: 4800 bps.• Data format: IEC611162-1 See Appendix

C.operation Unit External Buzzer Stop Contact Input(MKC327 / MKN018)

BSPINBSNIN

Contact closed at buzzer stop.

. K

CPU

Bridge Select ion Contact Signal Input(MKC327 / MKN018)

BRGSELLPN / BSC

Contact closed at AFT.Contact open at FWD.

Prohibition Of Head-ing Changeover Con-tact Input(MKC327 / MKN018)

SELOFSELOFC

Contact closed at C/O PRF.

Gyro FailContact Output

(MKC327)

1FAIL1FAILC

2FAIL2FAILC

FAIL

FAILC

P

StateContact

JP 1-2 JP 2-3Power OFF Close OpenNormal Close OpenFail Open Close

Power FailContact Output

(MKC327)

1PFO1PFOC

2PFO2PFOC

PFO

PFOC

P

StateContact

JP 1-2 JP 2-3Power OFF Close Open

Normal Close Open

Fail Open Close

RunningContact Output

(MKC327)

1RUN1RUNC

2RUN2RUNC

RUN

RUNC

P

StateContact

JP 1-2 JP 2-3Power OFF Close OpenRunning Open CloseNot running Close Open

6-7




System Fail Contact Output

(MKC327)

FAILFAILC FAIL

FAILC

P

StateContact


Deviation AlarmContact Output

(MKC327)

DEVDEVC DE

DE C

P

StateContact


Buzzer StopAcknowledge

(MKC327)

BSTOPBSTOPC BSTOP

BSTOPC

P

StateContact

JP 1-2 JP 2-3Normal Close OpenFail (at buzzer stop) Open Close

Output Heading Contact Output

(MKC327)

G1G2EXTCOM

COMEXTGG

Contact is made when the sensor is selected.

6-8



6.2 Serial Input/Output Data SentenceInput/output Sentence Specifications DataInput VMVSD YDK original Ship's speed

VBW IEC61162-1 Ship's speedVHW IEC61162-1 Ship's speedVTG IEC61162-1 Ship's speedGGA IEC61162-1 LatitudeGLL IEC61162-1 LatitudeHDT IEC61162-1 HeadingHDG IEC61162-1 HeadingHDM IEC61162-1 HeadingHRC YDK original Heading / Rate of turnTHS IEC61162-1 Heading / Status

Output HDT IEC61162-1 HeadingHDG IEC61162-1 HeadingHDM IEC61162-1 HeadingROT IEC61162-1 Rate of turnHRC YDK original Heading / Rate of turnPYDKH YDK original Heading / Rate of turnTHS IEC61162-1 Heading / Status

6-9



6.3 Setting Dip SwitchesRemove the upper cover of the master compass, and you will find the main assembly located in the deepest part with the dip switches positioned on its left. These dip switches determine the transmis-sion rate ,the communication data format, and DAC output settings.

DIP SW DIP SW DIP SW DIP SW

Bit Bit

N

FF

Bit Bit

N

FF

Bit Bit

N

FF

Bit Bit

N

FF

Master compass M.MAIN BD ASSY DIP switch

Each dip switch determines the following settings:

CAUTIONOnly technicians of the Service department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. are authorized to operat the setting of dip switches. However, if for some reason the service department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. permits you to perform these operations, be sure to follow the instructions described in this chapter.

� Dip-switch settings and functions on Mastercompass

SW No. Bit Functions ON OFF DefaultDIP SW1 1 reserved Set to "OFF" for operate OFF

2 OFF3 OFF4 OFF5 OFF6 OFF7 OFF

8 OFF

DIP SW2 1 OFF2 OFF3 OFF4 OFF5 OFF6 OFF7 OFF8 OFF

DIP SW3 1 OFF2 Setting of analog ROT 1 output range See (Table 1) Setting of analog

ROT 1 output range (page 6-10).OFF

3 OFF4 Setting of analog ROT 2 output range See (Table 1) Setting of analog


5 OFF6 Setting of analog ROT 3 output range See (Table 1) Setting of analog


7 OFF

6-10



SW No. Bit Functions ON OFF DefaultDIP SW3 8 Use C. operation unit Used Not Use ONDIP SW4 1 Serial output mode during system failure Keep latest value NULL OFF

2 Setting of baud rate for repeater compass 4800 bps 9600 bps OFF3 Reserved Set to "OFF" for operate OFF4 OFF5 OFF6 System Reserved Set to "OFF" for operate OFF7 OFF8 OFF

(Table 1) Setting of analog ROT 1 / ROT 2 / ROT 3 output rangeROT 1 ROT 2 ROT 3

Output RangeDIP SW 3 DIP SW 3 DIP SW 3Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ± 30 °/minOFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ± 100 °/min

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ± 300 °/min

ON ON ON ON ON ON ± 120 °/min

� Dip-switch settings and functions on MKR056 / MKN019

SW No. Bit Functions ON OFF DefaultDIP SW1 1 System Reserved Set to "OFF" for operate OFF

2 OFF3 OFF4 OFF5 Setting of input sentence for serial

port See (Table 2) Setting of input sen-tence for serial port (page 6-10).

OFF6 OFF7 Setting of baud rate for serial port 9600 bps 4800 bps OFF8 System Reserved Set to "OFF" for operate OFF

(Table 2) Setting of input sentence for serial portDIP SW 1

Data FormatBit 5 Bit 6OFF OFF $HEHDTON OFF $HCHDT

OFF ON $GPHDT

6-11



6.4 List of Initial ValuesAfter Command 36 is executed, Initial values are set as follows:

� C.Operation Unit

Items ValueExternal heading selection Port-1 NONE

Port-2 NONEPort-3 NONE

Speed input AUTO / MANUAL MANUALSetting value 0 knot

Latitude input AUTO / MANUAL MANUAL

Setting value 0 °Threshold of deviation alarm G1 / G2 00.0°

G1 / EXT 00.0°G2 / EXT 00.0°

External input format Speed Port No. P (Pulse port)Already / New –Format –

Latitude Port No. –Ready-made / New –Data format –

External heading 1 Port No. –Ready-made / New –Data format –ROT input NONE



6-12



� Master compass

Items ValueFollow-up gain Gain 100 %Master compass alignment REL / ABS –

Correction value 0 °Baud rate of output signal PORT-1 baud rate 4800 bps

PORT-2 baud rate 4800 bpsPORT-3 baud rate 4800 bpsPORT-4 baud rate 4800 bps

Output signal format PORT-1 GYRO REC 1 Output = HDG/ROTFormat= HEHRCPeriod= 200 ms

REC 2 –REC 3 –

EXT REC 1 –REC 2 –REC 3 –

PORT-2 GYRO REC 1 Output = HDG/ROTFormat = HEHRCPeriod = 200 ms

REC 2 –REC3 –

EXT REC 1 –REC 2 –REC 3 –

PORT-3 GYRO REC 1 Output = HDGFormat = HEHDTPeriod = 1 s

REC 2 Output = ROTFormat= HEROTPeriod = 1 s

REC 3 –EXT REC 1 –

REC 2 –REC 3 –

PORT-4 GYRO REC 1 –REC 2 –REC3 –

Stepper signal control Maximum angular velocity 24 °/sMaximum angular acceleration 140 °/s2

6-13



6.5 External Product View� Master Compass

AA

.

.HOLE

HOLE

M M 2 1

MAINTENANCE AREA

MAINTENANCE AREA

BOW SIDE

CABLE ENTRYSECTION A A

Unit mm

6-14



� Control Box

HOLE

HOLE

HOLE

HOLE

M C 2

M C 2 F

C. OPERATION UNIT

EARTH TERMINAL CABLE INLET

INHALATIONEXHAUST

PANEL CUTC. OPERATION UNIT

CABLE INLET

EXHAUST INHALATION

EARTH TERMINAL

Unit mm

6-15



� AC Adapter

HOLEM

INHALATION

INHALATION

EARTH TERMINAL

CABLE INLET X HOLE

EXHAUST

INHALATION

INHALATION

CABLE INLET X HOLE

EXHAUST

M 1

6-16



� Repeater Compass / Junction Box / Stand & Bracket

N

W

S

E

HOLE

HOLE

.

. HOLE

epeater Co pass M Connection ox

M N 1

ori ontal tan22

ori ontal rac et 2 1

BASE LINE

ilting rac et21

BOW

DRAIN

Unit mm

6-17



� Steering Repeater Compass

S

E

W

N

.

.HOLE

C

HOLE

M .

.

.

HOLE

.

.

HOLE

M

.

M .

.

.

HOLE

M

M .

HOLE

.

.

.

HOLE

HOLE.

.

M .

S

W

N

S

W

N

S

W

N

E EE

M F2

M F1

M

M

PANEL CUTPANEL CUT

PANEL CUT MOUNTING DIMENSION

ie Z

ie Z

Unit mm

6-18



� C.operation unit

.

.HOLEC

HOLE or M

M .

HOLE

.

.

HOLEC

HOLE or M

M .

M

.

PANEL CUT

PANEL CUT

Attac e ca e Ma . m

Attac e ca e Ma . m

Unit mm

� Junction Unit

TB

TB

TB

TB

TB

.

.

HOLE

TB

M N 1

Ma m

7-1


< 7.Maintenance, Inspection and Installation >

7. Maintenance, Inspection and Installation

7.1 InspectionImplement the following procedures of the daily inspection and regular inspection to maintain the gyrocompass in a state of normal working order:

7.1.1 Daily InspectionThe inspection items are as follows.

Inspection Item Inspection Contents and Procedure RecommendedInspection Interval

1Gyrosphere drive current Check that the current is within the range 0.15 A

to 0.35 A by executing the command code “15”. (See section 4.1.6)

Once/day (at an arrival)

2 Repeater compass align-ment

Check that the heading of each Repeater com-pass agrees with that of the Master compass. Once/departure

3Ship’s speed value Latitude Check that there are no errors in ship’s speed

and latitude by executing the command codes “21” and “22”. (See section 4.2.2 and 4.2.3)

Once/day

4 Azimuth error Check that there is no azimuth error using astro-nomical or physical target observation. Once/day

5

DC Battery input Check that the DC input voltage of AC Adapter (MKS066/MKS071) are regulated voltage. MKS066 : TB1 3-4 and 23-24 MKS071 : TB1 3-4 and TB2 3-4

Once/year

NOTECheck the readings of the Repeater compass card when the ship’s speed is set to “0.” If a speed-error correction is performed, the Master compass card reading will not agree with the Repeater compass card reading.

7.1.2 Regular MaintenancePerform the following maintenance once a year.

NOTEOrder to the Service Department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. for regular inspection.

Inspection Item Procedure1 Gyrosphere Cleaning of the lower and band electrode .

2 Container Cleaning of inside surface ,center pin (Exercise care when handling.) , lower electrode ,band electrode, follow-up electrode.

3 Supporting Liquid Replacement of supporting liquid4 Air filter Cleaning of the air filter. (Replace the air filter when remarkably dirty.)

7-2



7.2 Maintenance of the Gyrosphere

CAUTIONOnly technicians of the Service department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. are authorized to implement the operations and other work described in this chapter. However, if for some reason the service department of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. permits you to perform these operations, be sure to follow the instructions described in this chapter.

7.2.1 Precautions During Removal� The gyrosphere should not be removed from the Master compass until at least

1.5 hours has elapsed since the power has been turned.

� Make sure that the surrounding area of the Master compass is clean, there isample lighting and prepare all required equipment and tools before beginning work. To avoid damaging the nuts and bolts, be sure to use the correct tools such as drivers and wrenches for each part.

� Be sure to do the following to ensure proper reinstallation of the gyrosphere:• Provide mating marks to the required portions before disassembly.

• Temporarily reinsert the bolts into the correct holes.

• Place the disassembled parts in the correct order on a piece of clean paper or cloth.

• If wires are to be disconnected, keep a record of the color of each wire and attach labels to them to ensure correct reconnection.

� Do not remove any part that does not need to be disassembled.

� Never disassemble the gyrosphere.

CAUTIONPrecautions in handling the gyrosphere

• Hold the gyrosphere firmly with both hands so as not to subject it to any shock.

• Do not drop the gyrosphere. Dropping the gyrosphere may result in damage to the internal mechanism or lead to personal injury.

• Do not disassemble the gyrosphere.

Precautions in handling the container

• Hold the container firmly with both hands.

• Do not drop it. Dropping the gyrosphere may result in damage to the internal mechanism or lead to personal injury.

7-3



7.2.2 Removing the Gyrosphere

� Equipment and tools to be preparedBeaker, No.2 Phillips screwdriver, minus screwdriver, syringe , a bottle for waste liquid, gyrosphere stand and container stand.

G rosp ere stanContainer stan

S rin e

Bea er

� Removal of the container from the master compass and take-out of the gyrosphere

Remove the connectors connecting the master compass and the container.

Loosen the container bolts and remove the container from the master compass.

Remove the screw from the vent hole.

Remove the cap from the center pin.Remove the cap from the center pin.

Pull out the center pin.

Place the beaker under the drain and remove the drain screw.

Disengage the connectors that connect the upper and lower containers.

Loosen the nut and rotate the hook to outer side.

Remove the upper container.

Remove the supporting liquid from within the funnel-shaped portion.

Take the gyrosphere out of the lower container.

CAUTIONUse the container stand so that the container should not fall while working.

NOTENotes about disposal of the used supporting liquid.

• To dispose of used supporting liquid , please request processing to permitted industrial waste disposal trader.

• Or contact your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd.

7-4



� Procedure for removing the gyrospereRemove the connectors connecting the master compass and the container.

Disen a e t e connectors termina s .

Loosen the container bolts and remove the container from the master compass.Loosen t e t ree containe o ts. Rotate counterc oc ise i e i tin t e container an remo e.Be care u not to et t e container it t e oor.

Container olts

Remove the screw from the vent hole.Remo e t e scre rom t e ent o e.

ent hole

Remove the cap from the center pin.Turn t e cap o t e center pin to remo e it.

7-5



Pull out the center pin.Pu out t e center pin.

Place the beaker under the drain and remove the drain screw.Remo e t e rain scre .

Drain a t e supportin i ui rom t e rain o e i e o in t e container as ori onta as possi e.

A ter rainin reinsert t e scre in t e rain o e.

Disengage the connectors that connect the upper and lower containers.Disen a e t e connectors t o termina s .

7-6



Remove the hook that fasten the upper and lower containers together.Loosen t e on nut i e pressin minus ri er unti t e oo rotates to outsi e.Loosen a on nut in t e same a .

ong nut

Remove the upper container.Li t t e upper container an remo e.Ta e care in t e irection o a oo s.

Remove the supporting liquid from within the funnel-shaped portion.Remo e t e supportin i ui rom t e unne s ape portion it a s rin e remo e a i ui s .

CAUTION Do not upset the gyroshere.

7-7



Take the gyrosphere out of the lower container.W en ta in out t e rosp ere o t e si e in a ocation it no o ine on it.

P ace t e remo e ros pere on to a rosp ere stan .

7-8



7.2.3 Installing the Gyrosphere� Equipment and tools to be prepared

Prepare a gyrosphere, center pin, syringe, beaker, funnel, liquid, No.2 Phillips screwdriver,minus screwdriver, Gyrosphere stand and Container stand .

Container stan

Center pinS rin e

Bea er

G rosp ere stan

� Installing the gyrosphere and attaching the container to the master compassInstallation of the gyrosphere in the container should be carried out on a flat surface and care should be taken not to knock the container over.

CAUTIONReplace the following parts at the maintenance.

• O ring of center pin

• O ring of drain screw

• O ring of container

• Seal washer of vent hole screw

Cleaning.

Confirm that oil doesn’t stick to the gyrosphere (side, lower and following electrode) and. top of the center pin. If oil sticks, get rid of it with gauze contain benzine.

Confirm that the drain screw in the lower container is tight and then put the gyrosphere in the lower container.

Attach the upper container to the lower containers.

Pour the supporting liquid into the container.

Insert the center pin and put the cap on.

Seal the vent hole.

Connect the connector.

Engage the container into position on the master compass and tighten the bolts.

Fasten the connectors that connect the master compass to the container.

7-9



CAUTIONUse the container stand so that the container should not fall while working.

� Procedure for installing the gyrosphere

Cleaning.Confirm that oil doesn’t stick to the gyrosphere (side, lower and following electrode) and top of the center pin. If oil sticks, get rid of it with gauze contain benzine.

CAUTIONWipe the electrode of gyrosphere and container with gauze which soaked benzine for cleaning. Take care as follows at cleaning.• Do not flake off the painting of gyrosphere.• Do not bend the electrode of container.• Do not put benzine on glue of gyrosphere.• Do not use the sponge with grinding.

Gyrosphere

ower container

Upper container

Be care u o not ama e to t e e ectro e en ou ipe o t e stain it c ot .

p ease ipe rom center o t e e ectro e to outsi e irection

Si e an e ectro eo t e rosp ere

Lo er e ectro e ot e container

Fo o up e ectro e o container

Ban e ectro e o container

Center in

Top

7-10



Put the gyrosphere in the lower container.

rain screwcon irm t at an O rin is attac e .

ower container

rain

Con irm t at t ere is an O rin t e o er container.

Ho t e rosp ere as s o n in t e p oto an it t e container ti te p ace it into t e container. Ho t e sp ere on t e opposite si e o t e o ine.

Do not ti t t e rosp ere e on t e re uire imit .

A ter p acin t e rosp ere in t e container position t e container an rosp ere ori onta .　　

Gyrosphere

ring

Attach the upper container to the lower containers.Con irm t at t ere is an O rin t e o er container t en a i n t e noc pin an it ot t e upper an o er containers to eac ot er.

ole

in

7-11



Rotate t e oo to insi e an ti ten t e onnut ri er unti t e upper container c oses a erence to o er container.

Ti ten si on nut. con irm t at t e upper container c oses a erence to o er container.

Minus screw ri er

Rotate t e oo to insi e

Pour the liquid into the container.Prepare t e supportin i ui in t e ea er.

Insert t e unne into t e o e o t e center pin a ter put o t e ent o e scre .

pour i ui s o rom t e ea er into t e unne unti it e ins to o er o rom t e ent o e. Li ui is use m in tota

ent hole

7-12



Insert the center pin and put the cap on.Con irm t at t ere is an O rin on t e center pin an t en insert t e center pin.

ring

Put t e cap on.

Seal the vent hole.Sea t e ent o e it scre .

Wipe o an i ui t at o er o s rom t e ent o e it t e ra .

Connect the connector.Fasten t e connectors t o termina s t at connect t e upper an o er containers.

7-13



Engage the container into position on the master compass and tighten the bolts.Insert t e container o ts into t e an in s it o master compass an rotate c oc i e t e container.

anging slit

Container olts

Container olts

Mating ar s

A i n t e matin mar s en en a in t e container.T en ti ten t e container o ts.

Fasten the connectors that connect the master compass to the container.Connect t e connector.

7-14



7.2.4 Replacement of Lamps in the Repeater Compass

P ace t e repeater compass on a stan it t e repeater car ace o n an ra a i nment mar s on t e o er

co er an t e o .

Remo e t e ei t mountin o ts rom t e o er co er.

Raise t e o er co er to separate it rom t e o .

o t e o er co er in t is position i e rep acin t e i uminatin amp or

amps.

A i n t e a i nment mar s an t en ti ten t e ei t o ts.

Avoid disassembling the repeater compass any further. When these procedures are to be carried out aboard a ship, close attention must be paid so that reassembling is carried out correctly. If these procedures cannot be carried out aboard, contact your nearest service agent of Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd.

7.2.5 Replacing the FuseThe Control box (MKC327) and AC adapter (MKS066/MKS071) use the fuses to protect the system. If the fuse is fused, replace it.Refer the appendix-4 to confirm the fuse position.

CAUTIONTurn off the power supply when replacing the fuse.

The capacity of fuse depends on system configuration. Select the fuse of appropriate capacity.

7-15



7.2.6 Confirmation of System OperationCMZ900 system have the command to confirm the system operation.

� Lamp testIt is possible to check the display and buzzer sound by operating the keys of the operation unit.See section 3.2.2

� Repeater signal outputIt is possible to output the repeater signals, serial signals and analog signals.See section 4.3.4

� Analog signal outputIt is possible to output the arbitrary analog voltage.See section 4.3.2

7.2.7 Preparation of Supporting LiquidApproximately 650 mL of supporting liquid are used in the Master compass unit, and further 1 L of supporting liquid are provided for spare. Contact Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd. for further supplies. Supporting liquid should always be supplied by Yokogawa Denshikiki Co., Ltd., but in unavoidable circumstances, you may prepare supporting liquid as follows:Put the each material in distilled water at the specified rate. Stir the mixture until the benzoic acid dissolves. If the benzoic acid does not melt easily, heat the mixture at less than 90 degrees. At then use the protection tool so as not to inhale.

Distilled water 1.8 LGlycerin 145 mLBenzoic acid 3.2 g

NOTEIf the specific gravity of the prepared liquid deviates from the value shown below, add glycerin or distilled water to make fine adjustment.

Temperature Specific Gravity15 °C 1.0230 ± 0.00120 °C 1.0220 ± 0.00125 °C 1.0208 ± 0.00130 °C 1.0193 ± 0.001

7-16



7.3 Precautions During InstallationExercise care with the following items when installing a gyrocompass.

7.3.1 Vibration MeasuresThe floors on which the Master compass and the horizontal stands are installed, and the walls on which the remote unit, horizontal brackets, tilted brackets, course recorder, digital Repeater com-pass, etc. are installed, should be reinforced against vibrations from the hull.

7.3.2 Parallelism of Lubber’s LinesInstall the Master compass, Repeater compasses for the horizontal stand and Repeater com-passes for the horizontal bracket so that their lubber’s lines are parallel with ship’s fore-and-aft line. Since the accuracy of the parallelism of these lines is the basis of heading measurement, adjust them to within an accuracy of ± 0.5 °.

7.3.3 Service AreaEnsure that the dimensions of the running, operating and maintenance area of the Master compass are as specified below.

mmor more

mmor more

mmor more

mmor more

Front

A-1


< Appendix >

Appendix-1 Description of Speed Error and Speed Error Table

1.1 Speed ErrorThe speed error is an error generated when a ship in which a gyrocompass is installed sails a course other than east or west. Its value is determined depending on the ship’s speed, course, and latitude. (It is not related to the kind or type of gyrocompass.)

The north-seeking tendency of a gyrocompass is based on the earth’s rotation. When a ship sails, the resultant motion of the ship’s motion and the earth’s rotation acts on the north-seeking ten-dency of the gyro. If the course of the ship deviates towards the north or south, the direction of the resultant motion deviates north or south and thus an error occurs because the north-seeking force of the gyro acts perpendicular to this resultant motion. That is, the speed error is the angle of the difference between this resultant motion and the east-west direction.

1.2 Determining Speed Error

In the figure above, AC = V cos θ = K cos ϕ • sin δSince δ is a small value,

sinδ = δ (radian) = 1 / 57.3 δ (unit: degree)From these equations, δ = 57.3 V cos θ / 900 cos ϕIf we assume, for example, that the ship is at the equator (ϕ = 0), the gyrocompass course is N (θ = 0), and the ship’s speed is 30 knot, then

δ = 57.3 × 30 / 900 = 1.91 degrees = 1 ° 54 ’When the value of θ is between 270 ° to 90 °, the compass indication increases. Therefore, the ship’s true course is as shown below. 0 ° - 1 ° 54 ’ = 358 ° 6 ’As seen above, if the compass course deviates towards the north, the true course can be obtained by subtracting the speed error from the compass course, and if the course deviates towards the south, the true course is obtained by adding the speed error to the compass course.Next we will describe how to determine the speed error depending on ship’s speed, course and latitude, using the following two procedures. The true course can be determined by referring to the following table and chart.

NN

Bθδ

δC θ

AΚcosψ

ψ: LatitudeK: Speed of the earth’s rotation at

the equator (About 900 knot)V: Ship’s speed (knot)θ: Gyrocompass courseδ: Speed error

NN

Bθδ

δC θ

AΚcosψ

ψ: LatitudeK: Speed of the earth’s rotation at

the equator (About 900 knot)V: Ship’s speed (knot)θ: Gyrocompass courseδ: Speed error

A-2


< Appendix >

(1) Determining the speed error using the speed error calibration table (Table-1)Refer to the speed error calibration table (Table-1) to determine the correction value and then cor-rect the course either by subtracting the correction value if the course has deviated towards the north or by adding the correction value if the course has deviated towards the south. For example, assume that the ship is sailing near the latitude of 40 ° and the course is read at 30 ° and the speed at 16 knots. The correction value under these conditions is shown as 1.1 in the table. Since the ship is sailing north, the true course of the ship is 30 ° - 1.1 ° = 28.9 °. Similarly, assume that the ship is sailing near the latitude of 40 ° and the course is read at 150° and the speed at 16 knots. In this case, the ship is sailing south, and so the true course is 150 ° + 1.1 ° = 151.1 °.

(2) Determining the speed error using the speed error calibration chart (Chart-1)

� Locate the ship’s speed V on the horizontal axis.

� Draw a vertical straight line from the position of the ship’s speed and determine the intersection with the line of gyrocompass course angle θ where the angle θ is the deviation towards the north if the ship is sailing north and towards the south if the ship is sailing south.

� Next, draw a straight line that crosses that intersection and is parallel to the horizontal axis, and determine the intersection with the line of current latitude ϕ of the ship.

� The speed error can now be read from this second intersection. The speed error thus obtained must be read as a negative value if the ship is sailing north and positive if the ship is sailing south.

Example:Assume that the ship is sailing at a speed of 12 knots at the point of north latitude of 40 ° and the gyrocompass course reads 320 °.The course of 320 ° indicates that the course deviates by 40 ° from the north towards the west. Draw a vertical straight line from point (a), at 12 knots on the horizontal axis, and determine the intersection with the line of θ = 40 °, (b). Draw a horizontal straight line that crosses point (b) and determine another intersection with the line of ϕ = 40 °, (c). The speed error can now be read from this second intersection (c), which is 0.77. This gives the true course of the ship as 319.23 °.

A-3


< Appendix >

Table-1 Speed Error Calibration TableDetermine the true heading by correcting the compass course using this table.

Lati-tude

Course(degrees) Speed (knot)Northward Southward 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40

0°~

20°

0153045607590

360345330315300285270

180165150135120105 90

180195210225240255270

0.30.30.20.20.10.10.0

0.50.50.40.40.30.20.0

0.80.80.60.50.40.20.0

1.01.00.90.70.50.30.0

1.31.31.10.90.70.40.0

1.51.41.31.10.80.40.0

1.71.71.51.20.90.50.0

2.12.01.81.41.00.50.0

2.32.22.01.61.20.60.0

2.62.52.31.81.30.60.0

30°

0153045607590

360345330315300285270

180165150135120105 90

180195210225240255270

0.30.30.20.20.20.10.0

0.60.60.50.40.30.20.0

0.90.90.70.60.50.30.0

1.21.11.00.80.60.30.0

1.51.41.21.00.80.40.0

1.71.61.51.20.90.40.0

2.02.01.81.41.00.50.0

2.32.32.01.61.20.60.0

2.62.52.31.81.30.70.0

3.02.32.52.21.50.70.0

40°

0153045607590

360345330315300285270

180165150135120105 90

180195210225240255270

0.30.30.30.20.20.10.0

0.70.70.60.50.30.20.0

1.01.00.80.70.60.30.0

1.31.21.10.90.70.30.0

1.71.51.41.20.90.40.0

2.01.91.71.41.00.50.0

2.32.22.01.61.20.60.0

2.62.52.31.81.30.70.0

3.02.82.62.21.50.70.0

3.33.22.82.31.80.80.0

45°

0153045607590

360345330315300285270

180165150135120105 90

180195210225240255270

0.40.30.30.30.20.10.0

0.70.70.60.50.40.20.0

1.11.00.90.80.50.30.0

1.41.41.21.00.70.40.0

1.81.71.61.20.90.50.0

2.22.11.91.51.10.60.0

2.52.42.11.71.20.60.0

2.82.82.52.01.50.70.0

3.23.22.82.31.60.80.0

3.63.53.22.51.80.90.0

50°

0153045607590

360345330315300285270

180165150135120105 90

180195210225240255270

0.40.40.30.30.20.10.0

0.80.80.70.60.40.20.0

1.21.11.00.80.60.30.0

1.61.51.31.10.80.40.0

2.01.81.61.41.00.50.0

2.42.22.01.71.20.60.0

2.82.62.32.01.40.70.0

3.23.02.62.31.60.80.0

3.63.53.02.51.80.90.0

4.03.83.42.82.01.00.0

55°

0153045607590

360345330315300285270

180165150135120105 90

180195210225240255270

0.40.40.40.30.20.10.0

0.90.90.80.60.40.20.0

1.31.31.10.90.70.30.0

1.81.71.51.30.90.50.0

2.22.11.91.61.10.60.0

2.72.62.31.91.30.70.0

3.23.02.72.31.50.80.0

3.53.43.22.51.70.90.0

4.03.83.52.82.01.00.0

4.44.33.83.12.21.20.0

60°

0153045607590

360345330315300285270

180165150135120105 90

180195210225240255270

0.50.50.40.40.30.20.0

1.00.90.80.70.50.30.0

1.51.41.31.10.80.40.0

2.01.91.71.41.00.60.0

2.52.42.11.81.30.70.0

3.12.92.62.21.50.80.0

3.63.53.02.51.81.00.0

4.24.03.52.82.01.10.0

4.64.54.03.22.31.20.0

5.04.84.33.52.51.30.0

65°

0153045607590

360345330315300285270

180165150135120105 90

180195210225240255270

0.60.60.50.40.30.20.0

1.21.21.00.90.60.30.0

1.81.71.61.30.90.50.0

2.42.32.11.71.20.60.0

3.02.92.62.11.50.80.0

3.63.53.12.61.80.90.0

4.24.13.63.02.21.10.0

4.84.64.23.42.41.30.0

5.55.24.63.82.71.40.0

6.15.85.24.33.01.50.0

70°

0153045607590

360345330315300285270

180165150135120105 90

180195210225240255270

0.70.70.60.50.40.20.0

1.51.51.31.10.70.40.0

2.22.21.91.61.10.60.0

3.02.92.62.21.50.80.0

3.73.63.22.71.91.00.0

4.54.33.93.22.21.20.0

5.25.04.53.72.61.30.0

6.05.85.24.23.01.50.0

6.86.55.84.63.31.60.0

7.57.26.55.23.61.90.0

A-4


< Appendix >

Chart-1 Speed Error Calibration Chart

FA

A-5


< Appendix >

Appendix-2 Principle of Gyrocompass

2.1 GyroThe gyro is supported in a freely rotating manner around its longitudinal axis and transverse axis by supports and the center of gravity of the gyro and its supports is positioned at the intersection of both spinning axes, and the gyro is turned at a high speed (Figure 1). The direction of the gyro axes does not change even if the stand of the gyro is tilted or rotated. This is because the magnitude and direction of inertia of rotation (angular momentum) are maintained provided that neither friction nor external forces affect the rotating action. This is a characteristic of a gyro.

BA

B

Fi ure Fi ure

Hanging a weight from tip (A) of the spinning axis of the gyro (Figure 2), slightly lowers side (A) and this affects the spin of the gyro. The weight causes the gyro to spin around the BB’ axis, which creates a torque around the transverse axis. This causes the gyro to spin in the direction of the arrow, which generates a torque around the BB’ axis that supports the gravitational force of the weight. This phenomenon is called precession and is another typical characteristic of a gyro. Pro-vided there is no friction at each axis, the gyro angular momentum (moment of inertia × rotating speed), applied torque, and resulting precession speed have the following relations:

(1) Quantitative: Angular momentum × precession speed = torque(2) Direction: Vectors are shown in Figure 3.

A-6


< Appendix >

2.2 North-seeking Tendency of GyrocompassSuppose that a weight is hanging under the supports as shown in Figure 3 such that the center of gravity for the entire gyro system, supports and weight is positioned directly under the intersection of two axes. If friction on both longitudinal and transverse supports is negligible at this time, the end of the longitudinal axis A oscillates up and down and right and left in an elliptical orbit due to the gravitational force and spinning action of the earth.

The spin of the ellipse orientates around north. By attaching an adequate damping device, the amplitude of oscillation gradually decreases and the longitudinal axis stabilizes in the northern orientation. This is the gyrocompass. This north-seeking tendency is further detailed below.Figure 4 shows the earth’s spin. The components of the angular velocity of the spin, ω, at point p on latitude ϕ can be expressed as:ω sin ϕ (spinning motion around the vertical axis)ω cos ϕ (tilting motion along the horizontal meridian)

A

B

Precession spee

An u ar momentum

Tor ue

Fi ure

Wei t

ω cos φ

ω sin φ φ

φ

ω

ω

Angular velocity of spin of earth

Equator

Figure 4

If the gyro shown in Figure 3 is placed on point p with A facing east and B facing west and with the A-B axis horizontal (Figure 5), the orientation of the gyro re-mains the same. However, since the inclination at this point on the earth remains the same as time elapses, the end-point A of the A-B axis rises and the end-point B goes down relative to the horizontal plane. Then, precession is carried out as the weight generates a torque to return the A-B axis to the horizontal position. When end-point A arrives at the meridian with the gyro tilted, the tilt is at its maximum and end-point A contin-ues to turn towards the west. When end-point A enters on the west side of the meridian, the inclination starts acting so as to lower A. The torque caused by the weight gradually decreases and precession stops when end-point A reaches the west end. Then, like-wise, end-point A goes down and begins pointing to-wards north. In such a manner, the orientation of the gyro spins around with north at its center in an elliptical motion as shown in Figure 6.

A

B ω cos φ

ω sin φ

Up

Up

West

West

North

North

SouthEast

East

Down

Down

Figure 5

Figure 6

Horizon

A

B ω cos φ

ω sin φ

Up

Up

West

West

North

North

SouthEast

East

Down

Down

Figure 5

Figure 6

Horizon

A-7


< Appendix >

In a gyrocompass, this elliptical motion of the gyro is reduced and the orientation of the gyro stops at north. When the gyro axis is aligned with the meridian, end-point A stabilizes along the horizon-tal plane; however, when end-point A deviates either to the east or to the west, it lowers or rises away from the horizontal plane and starts moving towards north due to precession.

When the gyro axis is stable in a northern orientation, the precession force offsets the component, ω cos ϕ (spinning motion), of the earth’s spin.

The above describes the north-seeking principle. However, in reality, a gyro experiences rolling and pitching and other undesired influences. A single gyro cannot offset all these influences, and hence two gyros are linked together by a special mechanism to actively prevent rolling and pitching errors. This is performed by causing precession in each gyro as soon as the gyros are affected by an external force and thus canceling the external force just as with the aforementioned occurrence of a force offsetting the gravitational force of a weight. In this case, the resultant angular momentum of two gyros and the north-seeking tendency remain unchanged. Since the north-seeking force of a gyro is very small, the design of the gyro must be such that the frictions in the longitudinal and transverse axes are comparatively negligible, so as not to affect the north-seeking tendency.

2.3 Gyrocompass Errors2.3.1 Speed Error

Refer to Appendix-1, “Description of Speed Error and Speed Error Table.”

2.3.2 Acceleration ErrorIf there is a change in ship’s speed or course, a torque occurs on the gyrosphere because the center of gravity of the gyrosphere falls below the center of buoyancy. This causes an error in the north-seeking reading of the gyrosphere. This error varies with the position of the center of gravity while the speed error also varies with the changes in the ship’s course and speed. These errors in the reading can offset each other by adjustment of the position of the center of gravity. The optimum design of the center of gravity of the gyrosphere in the CMZ900 prevents the acceleration error from occurring. (As a result, the oscillation cycle of a gyrosphere when the damper is removed is about 85 minutes.)

2.3.3 Rolling and Pitching ErrorIf the gyrosphere is continuously subjected to vibration from the ship’s rolling and pitching and if the vibration cycles along the east-west axis and north-south axis of the gyrosphere greatly differ, this difference of vibration cycle between two axes causes an error. To compensate for this, two gyros are provided to reduce the differences between the vibration cycles along the north-south axis and east-west axis, thus preventing the rolling and pitching error. In addition, a damper mounted to the suspending mechanism damps vibration so as to gain stable reading.

A-8


< Appendix >

Appendix-3 Block Diagram

CONT

ROL

BOX

MKC

or D

C BA

CK U

P SY

STEM

or N

ONE

BAC

K UP

SYS

TEM

No.

Mas

ter C

ompa

ssNo

. M

aste

r Com

pass

AC IN

PUT

NO.

DC IN

PUT

TB

POW

ER S

UPPL

Y NO

. M

KM

POW

ER S

UPPL

Y NO

. M

KM

POW

ER S

UPPL

Y

AC O

UT

POW

ER S

UPPL

Y

AC O

UT

POW

ER S

UPPL

Y

AC O

UT

POW

ER S

UPPL

Y

AC O

UT

MP

MN

MP

MN

MP

MN

MP

MN

POUT

NOUT

POUT

NOUT

UOUT

OUT

UOUT

OUT

UOUT

OUT

UOUT

OUT

NO.

DC IN

PUT

DC

BATT

.INPU

T

POW

ER S

UPPL

Y CO

M D

COUT

POW

ER S

UPPL

Y CO

M D

COUT

//

/

AC

/H

SWSW

SW

C.O

PERA

TIO

N UN

ITM

KR

RDRA

RDRB

SDRA

SDRB

BSPI

NBS

NIN

RDA

RDB

RDA

RDA

RDB

RDB

SELO

FSE

LOFC

SGSDEA

SDEB

RUN

FAIL

PFO

DERUNC

SG EXT

G G COM

FAIL

FAIL

C

PFO

C

PFI

PFIC

DEC

RDRA

RDRB

SDRA

SDRB

FAIL

C

RUN

FAIL

PFO

RUNC

SG PFO

C

PFI

PFIC

FAIL

C

LPP

LPN

/BSC

BRG

SEL

NO.

NO.

NOC

NORM

GND SG

RDBA

RDBB

TB TB

BSTO

PBS

TOPC

TB

CN

TB TB

No.

Po

er a

i con

tact

out

put

No.

Run

nin

con

tact

out

put

No.

Ser

ia s

ina

I/O

No.

Fai

con

tact

out

put

Buer

sto

p Co

ntac

t inp

ut

Seria

si

na in

put

LOG

Unse

ecte

ro

ea

insi

na o

utpu

t

Deia

tion

cont

act o

utpu

t

Stat

us C

onta

ct o

utpu

t

Sst

em F

ai C

ont.o

utpu

t

Puse

inpu

t S

ips

spee

MEM

BRAN

E SW

RA/R

B

CN

C.M

AIN

BD A

SSY

E

CN

C.DI

SP B

D AS

SYB

CN

CABL

E AS

SY

A

Seria

si

na in

put

Seria

si

na in

put

Gro

se

ect

oc s

tatu

s in

put

Buer

sto

p co

ntac

t si

na o

utpu

t

Bri

e se

ect s

tatu

s in

put

B BG

TB

CNCN

SGSD

PIB

SDPO

A

SDPI

ASD

POB

TB

No.

Po

er a

i con

tact

inpu

t

No.

Po

er a

i con

tact

out

put

No.

Run

nin

con

tact

out

put

No.

Ser

ia s

ina

I/O

No.

Fai

con

tact

out

put

No.

Po

er a

i con

tact

inpu

t

SDRA

SDRB

SDRA

SDRBOUT

GND O

UTG

ND

Seria

out

put

Repe

ater

com

pass

Step

per s

ina

outpu

t

REF

SS SS SS COM

SDRA

SDRB

SDRA

SDRBOUT

GND O

UTG

ND

SDRA

SDRB

SDRA

SDRBOUT

GND O

UTG

ND

SDRA

SDRB

SDRA

SDRBOUT

GND O

UTG

ND REF

SS SS SS COM

REF

SS SS SS COM

REF

SS SS SS COM

TB TBTB TB

Seria

out

put

Re

peat

er co

mpa

ss

Seria

out

put

Re

peat

er co

mpa

ss

Seria

out

put

Re

peat

er co

mpa

ss

Repe

ater

com

pass

Repe

ater

com

pass

Repe

ater

com

pass

Repe

ater

com

pass

Seria

out

put

Seria

out

put

Seria

out

put

Seria

out

put

Step

per s

ina

outpu

t

Step

per s

ina

outpu

t

Step

per s

ina

outpu

t

Seria input

Seria input

Seria input

Seria input

Anao inputHDG / UD

Anao inputROTAnao inputROTAnao inputROT

Seria output

Seria output

Seria output

Anao outputHDG / UD

Anao outputROTAnao outputROTAnao outputROT

Repeatercompass

Steppersina input

Seria input

Seria input

Seria input

Seria input

Anao inputHDG / UD

Anao inputROTAnao inputROTAnao inputROT

Repeatercompass

Steppersina input

F F F F F

F

F F

GND

GND U

B BGND

CABL

E AS

SYXB

CHAN

GE

OER

BD

ASSY

T

RDARDBSG

HDG

RDARDB

SGRDARDBSG

UD

ROT

ROT

ROTCOM

COM

COM

COM

COM

RDARDBSG

HDG

RDARDBSG

RDARDBSG

UD

ROT

ROT

ROTCOM

COM

COM

COM

COM

REFSSSSSS

RDRARDRB

SG

COM

REFSSSSSS

RDRARDRB

SG

COM

TB

TB

TB

TB

BUFFER

BUFFERZEROGAIN

SDASDBSG

HDG

SDASDBSG

SDASDBSG

UD

ROT

ROT

ROTCOM

COM

COM

COM

COM

TB

GG

ACC

.

FF

FF

FF

A A A

DCBa

c U

p

FUSE

Rat

in

A

None

Bac

Up

A AF

FA

D

Seria

si

na

Ana

o s

ina

Repe

ater

Seria

sina

Ste

pper

si

na

SEL

A

CCCC

Pot

o Re

aSE

LSA

SEL

A

CCCC

RL

SEL

A

RL

DC

DC

CN

REF

REF

F F

SW

REF

SW

CN CN CN

STA

CN CN CNDC

POW

ER S

UPPL

Yor

REPE

ATER

DC/D

C

in

CNT

out

DC/D

C

in

CNT

out

PP

PS

PS

P.FA

ILDE

T.

P.FA

ILDE

T.

CNCN

CN

DUAL

PS

BDAS

SYR

FF

F F

FF

F

CN

CN CN

CN

P

DC/D

C

R.T

ERM

INAL

BD A

SSY N

S.T

ERM

INAL

BD A

SSY W

CN

REF

REF

CCCC

SEL

ASE

LSA

SELE

CTLA

TCH

CCCC

CC

CCSE

LA

SEL

A

RL

RL

CCCC

SEL

SA

SEL

A

CN

CC

NORM

CCCC

CCCC

MG

MG

G GNO

RSeec

t SW

DC/D

C

DC/D

C/

CC

/

CN

DC/D

C

DC/D

C/

CC

/

CCSE

LA

RL

SEL

SACC

RL

CC /

CCCC

CC /

RLP.

FAIL

DET.

P.FA

ILDE

T.

F F

CCCC

POW

ER F

AIL

STAT

USG

ENER

ATO

R

CC

CC

NORM

STA

PF PF

CC

C.TERMINAL BD ASSYZ

3.1 MKC327 Block Diagram

A-9


< Appendix >

CN

FF

FF

FF

A A

A

DCBu

c U

p

FUSE

Rat

in

A

None

Buc

Up A

A

FF

A

RDA

RDB

SG HDG

RDA

RDB

SG RDA

RDB

SG UD

ROT

ROT

ROT

COM

COM

COM

COM

COM

REF

SS SS SS

RDRA

RDRB

SG COMTB TB TB TB

CN

CN

CHAN

GE

OER

BDAS

SYT

DC/D

C

DC/D

C/

TP TP TP

DS

DC/D

C

DC/D

C/

TP TP

TPG

TP

TP

PSPSPSPSTP

TPG

TB

MP

MN

MP

MN

MP

MN

MP

MN

POUT

NOUT

POUT

NOUT

UOUT

OUT

UOUT

OUT

UOUT

OUT

UOUT

OUT

SWSW

SWF F F F F

F

GND

GND U

B BGND

GG

ACC

.

D

OUT

GND

TB

OUT

GND O

UTG

ND OUT

GND O

UTG

ND OUT

GND O

UTG

ND OUT

GND

FF F F F F F F

TB

R.TE

RMIN

AL B

D AS

SYN

CN

DC/D

C

PSCC

F

TPTP

G

TP TPG

S.T

ERM

INAL

BD

ASSY

W

CN CNCNRE

FCO

M

REF

COM

REF

COM

REF

COM

F F F F

TB TB

P

FCN

TB

C.TE

RMIN

AL B

D AS

SY

DCN

CC

DC

DC/D

C

MKR

TP TP TPGTP

TPG

TP

CC

GND

CCDS DS

GND

CC DSDS

DS

CC DSDS

DS

CCTP

G

GND

TB

SDASDB

SG

HDG

SDASDB

SGSDASDB

SG

UD

ROT

ROT

ROTCOM

COM

COM

COM

COM

DS

TPTP

G

SERI

AL

ANA

LOG

SIG

NAL

OUT

PUT

NF

AC/D

CAC

INPU

T to

AC /

H

UP NG

ND

NO NOC

NO NOC

UOUT

OUT

BU

AC A

DAPT

ER M

KS

DC IN

PUT

DC

AC IN

PUT

to

AC

/ H

DC IN

PUT

DC

RL

UP NNF

GND

NF

AC/D

C

P N

RL

UP NU

NF

BACK

UP

ASSY

TB TB

TB TB

F FF F F F F F F F F F

CONT

ROL

BOX

MKC

NFB NF

P NP N

TB

ROT

INDI

CATO

R

MKR

ROT

INDI

CATO

R

MKR

ROT

INDI

CATO

R M

KR

REPE

ATER

COM

PASS

REPE

ATER

COM

PASS

REPE

ATER

COM

PASS

REPE

ATER

COM

PASS

REPE

ATER

COM

PASS

REPE

ATER

COM

PASS

REPE

ATER

COM

PASS

REPE

ATER

COM

PASS

EXTE

RNAL

EUI

PMEN

T

EXTE

RNAL

EUI

PMEN

T

EXTE

RNAL

EUI

PMEN

T

EXTE

RNAL

EUI

PMEN

T

NO.

MAS

TER

CO

MPA

SSM

KM

NO.

MAS

TER

CO

MPA

SSM

KM

NFB NF

P NP N

TB

SERI

AL D

ISTR

IBUT

OR

MHB

TB

P N

SWTP TP

G

DC/D

C

CCTP TP

GG

ND

TBP N P N P N P N P N P N

F F F F F F

DIGI

TAL

REPE

ATER

DIGI

TAL

REPE

ATER

DIGI

TAL

REPE

ATER

DIGI

TAL

REPE

ATER

DIGI

TAL

REPE

ATER

DIGI

TAL

REPE

ATER

REF

F F

CN

RL

P.Fa

iDe

tect

er

P.Fa

iDe

tect

er

CC

SW SW

CN

CC

CC

CC

CC CC

TPTP

FL

TP

P

in in

CNT

TPTP

DC/D

C

PS

U

CN

CN CN CN

F

F

CN

TPTP FL

TP P

in in

CNT

TPTP

DC/D

C

PS

U

CN

DUAL

PS

BD A

SSY

R

F

CN

P.Fa

iDe

tect

er

FC

FE

P.Fa

iDe

tect

er

FC

FE

FC

FE

FC

FE

DS

DS

CC CC

RL

DS

RL

DSRE

F

REF

CC DS

GND

NO NOC

NO NOC

UOUT

OUT

BU BUG

ND

GND

RDA

RDB

SG HDG

RDA

RDB

SG RDA

RDB

SG UD

ROT

ROT

ROT

COM

COM

COM

COM

COM

REF

SS SS SS

RDRA

RDRB

SG COM

BUG

ND

DUAL

AC

ADAP

TER

M

KS

AC/D

CU

UNF

UU

NF

P N

TBF F F F

F F

P NNF

P N U U

TB

N NC

GND

N NC

RLNO NO

CNO NO

CUO

UTO

UT

BU GND

GND

BUG

ND

AC/D

CU

UNF

UU

NF

P N

TBF F F F

P NNF

P N U

TB

N NC

GND

N NC

RL

NO NOC

NO NOC

UOUT

OUT

BU GND

GND

BUG

ND

3.2 MKC327 Circuit Diagram (Power line)

A-10


< Appendix >

Seria output Repeater compass








3.3 MKC327 Circuit Diagram (R.TERMINAL BD ASSY I/F)

� R.TERMINAL BD ASSY (V8123VN) Test points and LED arrangement chartsTGP

TP

TPDS

TP

TP

A-11


< Appendix >

Steppersi naoutput

Steppersi naoutput

Steppersi naoutput

Steppersi naoutput

3.4 MKC327 Circuit Diagram (S.TERMINAL BD ASSY I/F)

� S.TERMINAL BD ASSY (V8123VW) Test points and Jumper pin arrangement charts

TP

TGP

TP

P

TP

TP

TP

TP

A-12


< Appendix >

CHAN

GE

OER

BD

ASSY

Sta

tus

Con

tro

Loic

CN

NORM

GND

NO NO NOC

TB

C.T

ERM

INAL

BDAS

SY Z

STSTP

PG

Gro

Se

ectL

oic

Seec

tInp

utLa

tc

Poer

On

Res

et

CNSW

G GNOR

NORM

SEL

PC PC

SS COM

REF

SS SS

TB

DS DS

CC

FC

RL

SS COM

REF

SS SS

TB

CC

CC

SEL

A

RLCC

RL RLCN

CNS.TE

RMIN

ALBD

ASSY W

No.

Mas

terC

ompa

ssSt

eppe

rsi

nain

put

No.

Mas

terC

ompa

ssSt

eppe

rsi

nain

put

PG

CCCC

SEL

SEL

RST

RST

GSE

L

GSE

L

MG MG

NORM

SEL

SEL

Sta

tus

Con

tro

Loic

Don

t C

are

P

SS SSDSDS

CN

DUAL

PSBD

ASSY R

REF

REF

CN

FE

FC

FE

SWSW

PC

CC

CC

PCCC

SEL

SEL

SEL

S

GPr

iorit

C.OP

E SEL

A

SEL

SA

CCRL

CC

SEL

A

SEL

ACC

CC

SEL

SEL

S SEL

SEL

AMG

MG

CC

G

DSDS

DS

G

SEL

G

DSDS

DS

G

DS

CCCC

NORM

ALC/

OSW

RL

RLRL

MG MG

T

Poer

Fai

Gen

erat

or

HOS

C

CC

SSR

CC

NORM

ST ST

DSSSR

HH

SAT

CCCC

TPCC

DS

Poer

Fai

Det

ect

CCTP

DS

CC

PFF

CF

E

CC

PF

Poer

Fai

Det

ect

CCTP

DS

CC

PFF

CF

E

CC

PF

NO

RM

Sta

tus

SW NOR

G G G G

G ai

ai

ai

none ai

G ai

ai

ai

ai

none

NORM H L L H H

Poer

Supp

LH

HL

HH

HH

LL

HH

HL

HH

LH

LH

HH

LH

LL

LL

HL

LL

NORM

PFPF

STA SSSSSSRE

FREF

REF

PF PF

Gro

Se

ect

Loic

LL

LH

LH

LL

HL

HH

HH

HL

LH

LH

LH

H H L H H L

SEL

ASE

LA

SEL

Not

eSE

LSA

HL L H

NOR

NOR

NOR

NOR

G G

SEL

SW

LH

LL

HH

GH

LH

LL

LG

HL

HH

LL

GL

HL

LL

HG

SEL

A

CC CC

G a

nG

P

oer

Sup

p

ai

G P

oer

Sup

pno

ne

G P

oer

Sup

pno

ne

TP

TP

TP TP TPTP

TP TP

3.5 (1) MKC327 Circuit Diagram (CHANGE-OVER BD ASSY I/F)

A-13


< Appendix >


A-14


< Appendix >


A-15


< Appendix >

� CHANGE-OVER BD ASSY LED, VR and Switch arrangement charts

DS

DS

DS

DS

DS

DS

DS

R

SW

R

DS DS DS DS SWDS DSDS

DS

DS

DS

R

DS

DS

DS

R

R

R

DS

A-16


< Appendix >

� CHANGE-OVER BD ASSY Test points arrangement charts

TP

TPG

TP

TPG

TP

TP

TP

TP

TPG

TP

TP

TP

TP TP TP

TP TP TP

TP

TP

TP

TP

TP

TPTPTP

TP

TP

TP

TP

TPG

TP

TP

TP

TPTP TP

TP

A-17


< Appendix >

C.O

PERA

TIO

NU

NIT

MKR

MEM

BRAN

E SW

RA/

RB

CN

C.M

AIN

BD

ASSY

E

CN

C.D

ISP

BDAS

SYB

CN

CAB

LEAS

SY

A/W

T/W

U/W

/B

CN

CN

CN

BUZZ

ER

C.T

ERM

INAL

BDAS

SYZ

UNC

TIO

NU

NIT

MKN

Nor

ma

tis

oar

isin

cu

ein

MKC

orM

KC.

RED

BLAC

K

3.6 MKR040&MKN018 Block Diagram

A-18


< Appendix >

C.O

PE

RA

TIO

N U

NIT

MK

R

C.M

AIN

BD

AS

SY

E

C.T

ER

MIN

AL

BD

AS

SY

Z

C.D

ISP

BD

AS

SY

B

3.7 MKR040&MKN018 Circuit Diagram (Power line)

A-19


< Appendix >

3.8 (1) MKR040&MKN018 Circuit Diagram (Signal I/F)

A-20


< Appendix >


A-21


< Appendix >


A-22


< Appendix >


A-23


< Appendix >


A-24


< Appendix >

� C.DISP BD ASSY (V8123VB) Test points arrangement charts

TP

TP

TP

TP

TP

� C.MAIN BD ASSY (V8123VE) Test points arrangement charts

TPTP TP

TPTP

TP

TP

TP

TP

TP

TP TP

� C.MAIN BD ASSY (V8123VE) LED arrangement charts

LEDLEDLEDLEDLED

LEDLEDLEDLEDLEDLED

A-25


< Appendix >

� C.TERMINAL BD ASSY (V8123VZ) Test points and Jumper pin arrangement charts

PP P P P

TP PPTPG P

TPG

TP

A-26


< Appendix >

CAS

E

CAS

E

CAS

E

M. P

S BD

ASS

YW

H

CAS

E

CAS

E

CAS

E

CAS

E

CO

NTA

INER

ASS

YC

W/D

P

OPE

RAT

ION

UN

IT A

SSY

MKR

RD

MA

RD

MB

SG SGP NR

DR

AR

DR

BSD

RA

SDR

B

SDB

SDA

SG SDB

SGSDB

SDA

SDA

SG REF

SS SS SS CO

MSG

PS PSG

ND

G/M

G/M

CG

FG

FC N NC

GN

DSD

RA

SDR

BSG

SDR

ASD

RB

SG

SDR

ASD

RB

SG

BSPI

NBS

NIN

HD

G UD

RO

T

RO

T

RO

TC

OM

CO

M

CO

M

CO

M

CO

M

TBTB

TB

NF

P NP N

GN

D

GN

D

M.T

ERM

INAL

BD A

SSY WL

M. P

WM

INBD

ASS

YW

E

SLIP

RIN

G

M. M

AIN

BD A

SSY

WB

PHO

T SE

NSO

RAS

SY U

TRAN

S AS

SYTC

UU

B

SW U

NIT

MKR

MM

I/F A

SSY

SLI/F

BO

ARD

ASSY SG

U

A/U

C

UK

CN

FAN

MO

TOR

ASS

YG

Z

Ana

o H

DG

/D

T ou

tput

Ana

o R

OT

outp

ut

Ana

o R

OT

outp

ut

Ana

o R

OT

outp

ut

CAS

ESe

ria

ata

outp

ut

CAS

E

CAS

E

Step

per s

ina

out

put

Seria

out

put

Rep

eate

r com

pass

Seria

at

a ou

tput

DC

INPU

TD

C

CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CNCN CN

CNCN

CN

CN

FAN

CN

RED

BLK

CN

CN

CN CN

CN CN

CN

CNCN

STEP

PIN

GM

OTO

R A

SSY

UR

A

UP

No.

MAS

TER

CO

MPA

SS M

KM

Seria

at

a ou

tput

CAS

E

Seria

out

put

Rep

eate

r com

pass

CAS

E

Seria

out

put

Rep

eate

r com

pass

MKR

I/F

Seria

at

a in

put

Bt

peC

ASE

3.9 MKM026 Block Diagram

A-27


< Appendix >

TBRE

FCO

M

PS PSG

ND

NO

ISE

FILT

ER

SWIT

CHUN

ITM

KR

GN

D

F F

GN

D

F

GN

D

F

P N

F

N NC

PR

L

CN

CN

CU

RR

ENT

LIM

ITTE

RFI

LTER

in in

SG CNT

FILT

ERin in

SG CNTPS PS

CN

CN

CN

in inGN

D

PSTP

TP

TRM

CTL

TP TPC

OM

in inTR

M

PS

CTL

TP TP CO

M

in inTR

M

PS

CTL

TP TP SS

in GND

OUT

TP

DC/D

CIN

ERTE

DD

. POSO

TRAN

SAS

SYTC

CN

CNCN

TPAC

U

ACTP

CN

CN

TP

TPI

IG

ND

CN

CN

TP TP

CC

CC

CN CN

CO

M

RTP

CO

M

PFAI

L

ACO

N

PC

Ne

o

CN

CN

CO

M

SLIP

LIN

G

M.T

ERM

INAL

BD A

SSY

WK/

WL

FAN

MO

TOR

ASSY

GZ

M.P

SBD

ASSY

WH

M.P

WM

BD

ASSY

WE

CN

P

GN

D

CN

TP TP

CN

P

TP

CN

ACO

N

PC

TP TP

CN

FILT

ERM.

OPER

ATIO

NU

NIT

MKR

CN

M.M

AIN

BDAS

SYW

B

CN

STEP

PIN

GM

OTO

RD

RIBE

R

TPCN

Sre

CN

3.10 MKM026 Circuit Diagram (Power line)

A-28


< Appendix >

CN

TP

CC

CC

CC

UU

U MPU

U

U U

CNU

CC

TP

TP

TP

U

CN

U

U

CCCC

U

UU

BUS

LIN

E

CN

CN

UM

OTO

RDR

IER

CC

CCU

OUT

PHO

TOSE

NSO

R

Wite

Yeo

OUT

AB

acOU

TA

Gree

nOU

TA

ReOU

TA

Bue

STEP

PIN

GM

OTO

R

TP

TP

CC

CC

TP TP∼DG

ND

U

CC

.TP

.

PC

DE

ACON I

PFAIL

M.PS ASSYWH

CN

M.M

AIN

BD

AS

SY

WB

M.P

WM

IN

BD

AS

SY

WE

CN

CN

3.11 (1) MKM026 Circuit Diagram (Signal I/F)

A-29


< Appendix >


A-30


< Appendix >


A-31


< Appendix >


A-32


< Appendix >

� M.MAIN BD ASSY (V8123VB) Test points and LED arrangement charts

TP

TP A

DC

CTP

TPTP

LED

LED

TP

TP D

GN

D

TP TP TP TP D

GN

D

TP D

GN

D

TP D

GN

D

LED

LED

LED

TPLE

D

TP

TP TP TPTP

LED

LED

LED

TP

CC

TP

.

A-33


< Appendix >

3.12 MKS066 Block Diagr

A-34


< Appendix >

3.13 MKS071 Block Diagram

A-35


< Appendix >

GN

D

SDA

SDB

GN

D

F

DC

/DC

ccTP

CH

STEP

PIN

GM

OTO

RC

ON

TRO

L

STEP

PIN

GM

OTO

RD

RI

ERR

orue

aus

tmen

t

OU

TBO

UTB

OU

TAO

UTA

AC

Zero

AD.

Sitc

Dim

mer

Zero

LED

Gre

en

ErrL

EDR

e

CPU

FAIL

WD

O

U

cc

cccc

cc

U

it

RPT

.CPU

ASS

YSN

GN

DO

UTA

OU

TB

DIM

ZER

OZE

RO

OU

TA

OU

TB

BTBT

CN

CN

EKAC

RPT

.TB

ASSY

S

P.H

.ASS

YTB

STEP

PING

MO

TOR

Yeo

Wite

Gre

enR

eB

ue

Bac

Wa

mou

ntt

peW

TB

TP

D

SW

DFA

ILSI

G

DC

C

cc

CN

3.14 MKR056 Block Diagram

A-36


< Appendix >

GN

D

SDA

SDB

GN

D

F

GN

DO

UTA

OU

TB

DIM

ZER

OZE

RO

OU

TA

OU

TB

BTBT

CN

EKAC

RPT

.TB

ASSY

S

P.H

.ASS

YTB

STEP

PIN

GM

OTO

R

Bac

Gre

enR

eB

ue

Gra

Purp

eYe

o

Wite

Ora

ne

Yeo

Wite

Gre

enR

eB

ue

Bac

or P

u t

peP

RNK

MX

OBN

OITCE

NN

OC

EPEA

TER

CO

MPA

SSM

KR

DC

/DC

ccTP

CH

STEP

PIN

GM

OTO

RC

ON

TRO

L

STEP

PIN

GM

OTO

RD

RI

ERR

orue

aus

tmen

t

OU

TBO

UTB

OU

TAO

UTA

AC

Zero

AD.

Sitc

Dim

mer

Zero

LED

Gre

en

ErrL

EDR

e

CPU

FAIL

WD

O

U

cc

cccc

cc

U

it

RPT

.CPU

ASS

YSN

CN

TP

D

SW

DFA

ILSI

G

DC

C

cc

CN

3.15 MKR050&MKN019 Block Diagram

A-37


< Appendix >

Appendix-4 Components List

4.1 Master Compass(1) MKM026-1,4

A-38

IM80B10M-17E 3r Edition : Sep.1,2009-00

< Appendix >

No PARTS NAME PART NO. No PARTS NAME PART NO.1 M.MAIN BD ASSY V8123WB 22 FILTER KIT V8817BF2 PHOTO SENSOR ASSY V8114UQ 23 FAN ASSY V8123GZ3 TRANS ASSY V8123TC 24 SCREW V8813CZ4 BRUSH UNIT ASSY V8114LP 25 CABLE ASSY V8114UB

5 BELT 5T117G008-01 26 O RING (for CENTER PIN)

V8005BE

6 STEPPING MORTER ASSY

V8114UR 27 CENTER PIN V8123DA

7 M.PWM INV BD ASSY V8123WE 28 O RING (for CONTAINER)

V8810QZ

8 M.PS BD ASSY V8123WH 29 LONG NUT V8123CS9 SPACER V8114LR 30 HOOK ASSY V8123CL10 SPACER V8114LS 31 SEAL WASHER V8810NE11 NOISE FILTER V8817BH 32 SCREW Y9303LU12 M.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123WK 33 TERMINAL (TB3) V8114VG13 CIRCUIT PROTECTOR 5T108F017-14 34 CABLE ASSY V8114UA14 I/F BOARD ASSY V8114SG 35 CABLE ASSY V8114UU15 MM I/F ASSY V8114SL 36 CABLE ASSY V8123GX16 SUPPORTING LIQUID V8114ML 37 SLIDE 1J124B038-0417 CONTAINER V8123DP 38 PLATE 1J355C497-0118 DAMPER ASSY V8123DQ 39 BRACKET V8210NH19 GYRO SPHERE MKT007 40 BASE V8801KV20 DRAIN SCREW V8114DH 41 SPACER V8114EZ21 O RING (for Drain) V8005BE 42 BUSH 1J371D699-01

A-39


< Appendix >

(2) MKM026-2,3

No PARTS NAME PART NO. No PARTS NAME PART NO.1 M.MAIN BD ASSY V8123WB 17 CONTAINER V8123DP2 PHOTO SENSOR ASSY V8114UQ 18 DAMPER ASSY V8123DQ3 TRANS ASSY V8123TC 19 GYRO SPHERE MKT0074 BRUSH UNIT ASSY V8114LP 20 DRAIN SCREW V8114DH5 BELT 5T117G008-01 21 O RING (for Drain) V8005BE6 STEPPING MORTER ASSY V8114UR 22 FILTER KIT V8817BF7 M.PWM BD ASSY V8123WE 23 FAN ASSY V8123GZ8 M.PS BD ASSY V8123WH 24 SCREW V8813CZ9 SPACER V8114LR 25 CABLE ASSY V8114UB10 SPACER V8114LS 26 R-STOPPER V8123HL11 NOISE FILTER V8817BH 27 CUSHION V8123HN12 M.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123WK 28 F-STOPPER V8123HK13 CIRCUIT PROTECTOR 5T108F017-14 29 C.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123VZ14 I/F BOARD ASSY V8114SG 30 CABLE ASSY V8114UK15 MM I/F ASSY V8114SL 31 CABLE ASSY

(for ANALOG output)V8114VD

16 SUPPORTING LIQUID V8114ML 32 CABLE ASSY (for FAN) V8123GY

A-40


< Appendix >

4.2 Control Box(1) MKC327-F,W

No PARTS NAME PART NO. No PARTS NAME PART NO.1 FUSE (15A ) 5T151A040-02 8 DUAL PS BD ASSY V8123VR2 FUSE (2A) A1031EF 9 C.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123VZ3 TOGGLE SWITCH A1351ST 10 CHANGEOVER BD ASSY V8123VT4 TOGGLE SWITCH ASSY V8123XC 11 TERMINAL V8817CB5 TERMINAL ASSY V8123MC 12 CABLE ASSY V8116VA6 R.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123VN 13 MKR040 SEE APPENDIX 4.87 S.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123VW 14 CLEAR COVER V8123LV

A-41


< Appendix >

(2) MKC327-S

No PARTS NAME PART NO. No PARTS NAME PART NO.1 FUSE (15A ) 5T151A040-02 13 SCREW V8813CZ2 FUSE (2A) A1031EF 14 R-STOPPER V8123HL3 TOGGLE SWITCH A1351ST 15 CUSHION V8123HN4 TOGGLE SWITCH ASSY V8123XN 16 F-STOPPER V8123HK5 TERMINAL ASSY V8123MC 17 DISTRIBUTION BD

ASSY (MHB306)V8152AC

6 R.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123VN 18 TRANSFORMER (PS101) 1G164A044-017 S.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123VW 19 DIODE MODULE(PS101) A1207HL8 DUAL PS BD ASSY V8123VR 20 AL CAPACITOR(PS101) A1299CA9 C.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123VZ 21 TERMINAL (PS101) 1G171Z152-0510 CHANGEOVER BD ASSY V8123VT 22 FUSE (2A)(PS101) A1031EF11 FILTER KIT V8817BF 23 CONNECTION TOOL

(MHB306)V8810QH

12 FAN ASSY V8123GZ

A-42


< Appendix >

4.3 Repeater Compass (MKR050)

NO PARTS NAME PART NO.1 LAMP V8811AQ2 MOTOR 5T165A165-013 WINDOW V8114HP4 PACKING 1G334C027-015 PACKING 1G116A008-016 PHOTO SENSOR ASSY V8114UX7 GASKET 1G333C041-018 CABLE ASSY V8114UW9 CABLE ASSY V8114UV10 PACKING 1G33E192-01

A-43


< Appendix >

4.4 Junction Box (MKN019)

No PARTS NAME PART NO.1 PACKING V8114JP2 RPT CPU BD ASSY V8114SN3 TERMINAL BOARD ASSY V8114SQ4 VARIABLE RESISTOR 5T162B015-025 O-RING 5T101Z005-046 KNOB 5T124A096-017 CAP 5T114A030-018 TOGGLE SWITCH V8817DE9 W.P. CAP V8817DF10 FAIL INDICATOR LED (RED) 5T166F082-0111 RUN INDICATOR LED (GREEN) 5T166F082-0212 SOCKET M8096JC

A-44


< Appendix >

4.5 Steering Repeater Compass (MKR056)

DIMMERRUN SYNC

FAIL

A B

BA

A A B B

No PARTS NAME PART NO. No PARTS NAME PART NO.

1 FRONT PANEL V8118BA(□192)V8118BC(□144) 13 COLLAR V8118BS

2 SCALE (36X) V8219FV 14 BUTTON 5T124A104-023 SCALE (1X) V8118DE 15 O RING 5T101Z005-094 GEAR V8114HV 16 RESISTOR (VR) 5T162A167-01

5 GEAR V8114HL 17 KNOB 5T124A043-02

6 GEAR 1G422A549-01 18 COLLAR 5T108F032-077 GEAR V8114HN 19 PHOTO SENSOR ASSY V8114UX8 GEAR V8114RR 20 RPT TB ASSY V8114SQ9 MOTOR 5T165A165-01 21 RPT CPU BD ASSY V8114SN

10 FAIL INDICATOR LED (RED) 5T166F082-03 22 LAMP V8811AQ

11 RUN INDICATOR LED (GREEN) 5T162F082-04 23 SOCKET A1178VF

12 SWITCH 5T154A272-01

A-45


< Appendix >

4.6 AC Adapter (MKS066)

No PARTS NAME PART NO. No PARTS NAME PART NO.

1 FUSE (15 A / 2 A)(*1) 5T151A040-02/A1031EF 13 FUSE (15 A / 2 A)(*1) 5T151A040-02/

A1031EF

2 FUSE (15 A / 2 A)(*1) 5T151A040-02/A1031EF 14 FUSE (15 A / 2 A)(*1) 5T151A040-02/

A1031EF3 FUSE (10 A) A1034EF 15 FUSE (10 A) A1034EF4 FUSE (10 A) A1034EF 16 FUSE (10 A) A1034EF5 FUSE (2 A) A1031EF 17 FUSE (2 A) A1031EF6 FUSE (2 A) A1031EF 18 FUSE (2 A) A1031EF7 SWITCH 5T154A123-01 19 SWITCH 5T154A123-018 BACK UP ASSY V8114TD 20 BACK UP ASSY V8114TD9 TERMINAL BOARD V8116TA 21 NOISE FILTER 5T164E043-0110 NOISE FILTER 5T164E043-01 22 NOISE FILTER A1118EN11 NOISE FILTER A1118EN 23 POWER SUPPLY 5T164A255-01

12 POWER SUPPLY 5T164A255-01

*1: with DC BACKUP : 5T151A040-02 (15 A) without DC BACKUP : A1031EF (2 A)

A-46


< Appendix >

4.7 Dual AC Adapter (MKS071)

No PARTS NAME PART NO.

1 SWITCH 5T154A123-012 FUSE (10 A) A1034EF3 FUSE (15 A / 2 A)(*1) 5T151A040-02/A1031EF4 FUSE (10 A) A1034EF5 FUSE (15 A / 2 A)(*1) 5T151A040-02/A1031EF6 FUSE (2 A) A1031EF7 POWER SUPPLY V8817CC8 BACK UP ASSY V8114TD9 TERMINAL BLOCK V8817EE10 NOISE FILTER (for AC) 5T614E039-0511 NOISE FILTER (for DC) V8817BL12 NOISE FILTER (for AC) V8817BH

*1: with DC BACKUP : 5T151A040-02 (15 A) without DC BACKUP : A1031EF (2 A)

A-47


< Appendix >

4.8 Junction Unit (MKN018)

No PARTS NAME PART NO.

1 C.TERMINAL BD ASSY V8123VZ

4.9 C.Operation Unit (MKR040)

RED

BLACK

GYRO GYRO

GYROGYRO

EXT

EXT

COMMAND

FAILBZ STOP SELECT

ENT

DIMMER / LAMP TEST


A-48


< Appendix >

Appendix-5 Serial Signal Format

5.1 Basic Format The basic serial signal format is as follows.All transmitted and received data shall be interpreted as ASCII characters.

CR LF

CR LFSUM SUM∗n

n No C ec sum

Use C ec sum

Data ie Data ie

Data ie Data ie

Data ie n

Data ie n

(1) “$”: Start of sentence.(2) Address field: This field serves to define the sentence. The first two characters are the talker identifier. The other three characters are the data identifier.

(3) Data field: This field is described with regular format data.

Each data is delimited by ",".

(4) Check-sum field : Check-sum value.

(5) <CR><LF> Terminator: End of sentence.

A-49


< Appendix >

5.2 Existing FormatCMZ900 system has several regular data format to communicate with external units.

Regular Data Format

Data Type Input OutputSpeed (SPD) VMVSD VBW VHW VTG –Latitude (POS) GGA GLL –Heading (HDG) HDT HDG HDM HRC THS HDT HDG HDM THSRate of turn (ROT) ROT HRC ROTHeading / Rate of turn (HDG/ROT) HRC HRC PYDKH

� VMVSD

CR LFM S D /

−/ . not . Nautica Mi e

O set rom C aracter

Hea er

Ta er IDData ID

Y Spee Cruisin istance

C ec sum i enti ierC ec sum

Terminator

� VBW

B W

. . CR LF

. . A . . A

A A


Hea er

Ta er ID Data ID

C ec sumC ec sum i enti ier

Terminator

Lon itu inaater spee

Trans erseater spee

Lon itu inaroun spee

Trans erseroun spee

StatusWater speeA ata a i

ata in a i

StatusGroun speeA ata a i

ata in a i

Stern trans erseater spee not

StatusStern ater spee A ata a i

ata in a i

StatusStern roun spee A ata a i

ata in a i

Stern trans erseroun spee not

� VHW

H W , . .

CR LF

. T . M N KData ie num er

C aracter

Hea er

Ta er ID Data ID

C ec sum i enti ier

C ec sum

Terminator

True ea in Ma netic ea in Water spee not Water spee m/ our

A-50


< Appendix >

� VTG

T G . .

CR LF

. T . M N K

a


Hea er

Ta er ID Data IDTrue course ma e oo o er roun

Ma netic course ma eoo o er roun

Groun spee not Groun spee m/ our

TerminatorC ec sum

C ec sum i enti ierStatusA Autonomous mo eE Estimate ea rec onin mo eM Manua Input Mo eS Simu ate Mo eN Data Not a i

� GGA

mmss.ss . .G G A a a

. . M . M .

CR LF


Hea er

Ta er ID Data ID UTC o position Latitu e N/S Lon itu e E/W

Num er o sate ites in use

Hori ontai ution o

precision

Antenna a titu e

Units o antenna a titu e m

Geoi a ei t

Units o eoi a ei t m

A e o Di erentiaGPS ata

Di erentia re erence station ID

Terminator

C ec sum

C ec sum i enti ier

GPS ua it In icator Fi not a ai a e GPS i Di erentia GPS i PPS i Rea Time Kinematic F oat RTK Estimate ea rec onin mo e Manua input mo e Simu ation mo e

� GLL

mmss.ss

. .G L L a a

A a CR LF


Hea er

Ta er ID Data ID Latitu eN/S

Lon itu eE/W

UTC o position Terminator

C ec sum

C ec sum i enti ier

FAA Mo e In icator A Autonomous mo e D Di erentia mo e E Estimate ea rec onin mo e M Manua input mo e S Simu ate mo e N Data not a i

StatusA Data a i FAA Mo e A D

Data in a i FAA Mo e E M S N

A-51


< Appendix >

� HDT

H D T T CR LF.Data ie num er

C aracter

Hea er

Ta er ID Data IDTrue ea inT True

Terminator

C ec sum

C ec sum i enti ier

� HDG

H D G a

CR LF

. . a.

Hea er

Ta er ID Data ID

Ma netic sensorea in

Ma netice iation e reesirection E / W

Ma neticariation e reesirection E / W

Terminator

C ec sum

C ec sum i enti ier


� HDM

H D M M CR LF.Data ie num er

C aracter

Hea er

Ta er ID Data IDMa neticHea in

Terminator

C ec sum

C ec sum i enti ier

� THS

T H S A CR LF.Data ie num er

C aracter

Hea er

Ta er ID Data ID Hea in

StatusA Autonomous mo eE Estimate ea rec onin mo eM Manua input mo eS Simu ate mo e

Data not a i

TerminatorC ec sum

C ec sum i enti ier

A-52


< Appendix >

� ROT

R O T A CR LF.Data ie num er

C aracter

Hea er

Ta er ID Data ID Rate o turn e rees/minute means o turns to port

Status A ata a i ata in a i

TerminatorC ec sum

C ec sum i enti ier

� HRC

H H CR LFC R C /

O set rom C aracter

Hea er

Ta er IDData ID

Hea in

Rate o turn

Terminator

C ec sum

C ec sum i enti ier

. e rees

/ . e rees/secon

� PYDKH

P D CR LFY K H . .Data ie Num er

C aracter

Ta er ID

Hea er

Data ID

Hea in e rees Rate o turn / .

e rees/minute

Terminator

C ec sum

C ec sum i enti ier

E terna GPS Compass

　 G ro No.G ro No.E terna G roE terna Ma

Instrument i enti ier

5.3 Heading Output for Repeater compass� HEHDT (for Repeater compass)

The heading signal for repeater compass has two digits after the decimal point.

H H CR LFE D T . / T

TerminatorC ec sumC ec sum I enti ier

Hea in

Data ID

Ta er ID

Hea er

C aracterO set rom

. e rees


Revision Information� Title : CMZ 900D Gyrocompass User’s Manual� Manual No. : IM80B10M-17E

Dec, 2007 1st EditionApr, 2009 2nd EditionSep, 2009 3rd Edition

� InquiriesFor inquiries about the content of this manual, please visit the following URL. Also visit the Yokogawa Denshikiki website at the following address for information on this product.URL for inquiries: Yokogawa Denshikiki website: http://www.yokogawa.com/YDK/contact.htm

� Written by Yokogawa Denshikiki Co,.Ltd. � Published by Yokogawa Denshikiki Co,.Ltd. 5-23-13 Sendagaya, Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151-0051, JAPAN

Blank Page

Documents

CMZ 900D Gyrocompass User’s Manual...v IM80B10M-17E 3rd Edition : Sep.1,2009-00 < Foreword > Foreword Thank you for purchasing the Yokogawa Denshikiki Co.,Ltd. CMZ900 Gyrocompass